- Manuals
- Brands
- Mitsubishi Electric
- CNC
- CNC Meldas 60
- Operation Manual
Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual PDF
MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective company.
Introduction
This manual is referred to when using the MELDAS 60/60S Series. This manual explains how to operate, run and set up this NC unit. Read this manual thoroughly before using the NC unit. To safely use this NC unit, thoroughly study the "Precautions for Safety" on the next page before use. * The "MELDAS60 Series" includes the M64A, M64, M65, M66 and M65V. * The "MELDAS60S Series" includes the M64AS, M64S, M65S and M66S. Details described in this manual
CAUTION
For items described as "Restrictions" or "Usable State" in this manual, the instruction manual issued by the machine maker takes precedence over this manual.
Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".
This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added. Confirm with the specifications issued by the machine maker before starting use.
Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine maker for details on each machine tool.
Some screens and functions may differ depending on the NC system (or its version), and some functions may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before use.
Refer to the following documents.
MELDAS 60/60S Series Alarm / Parameter Manual ............................................... BNP-B2201 MELDAS 60/60S Series MELDASMAGIC64 Programming Manual (M TYPE)...... BNP-B2182 MELDAS 60/60S Series MELDASMAGIC64 Programming Manual (L TYPE)....... BNP-B2181
In this NC unit, the machining programs, parameters and tool compensation data are saved in the memory (memory elements). This NC unit's memory is backed up by lithium batteries, and under normal conditions will last 6 years from the date of manufacture. However, data contents could be lost under the conditions described below. To prevent data loss, output important programs, parameters, etc., to a serial input/output device and save them. Refer to Section "III-8 Maintenance Functions" in this manual for information on how to do this. Data in the memory can be lost under these kinds of conditions.
(1) Incorrect operation
Data can be lost if the operator inadvertently changes data while editing a program or setting parameters. (This is not really a data loss, but it is a loss from the standpoint that the original data is gone.)
Data can be lost if the operator inadvertently deletes data or initializes NC unit.
(2) Battery life expires
When the battery life expires and there is not enough voltage to store the data in the memory, data can be lost by turning the power OFF.
(3) Faults
Data can be lost when faults occur and the control unit must be replaced.
< Important Usage Notes >
Precautions for Safety
Always read the specifications issued by the machine maker, this manual, related manuals and attached documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use. Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit. This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
DANGER
When the user may be subject to imminent fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.
WARNING
When the user may be subject to fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.
CAUTION
When the user may be subject to bodily injury or when physical damage may occur if handling is mistaken.
Note that even items ranked as "
CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the situation. In any case, important information that must always be observed is described.
DANGER
Not applicable in this manual.
WARNING
1. Items related to operation If the operation start position is set in a block which is in the middle of the program and the program is started, the program before the set block is not executed. Please confirm that G and F modal and coordinate values are appropriate. If there are coordinate system shift commands or M, S, T and B commands before the block set as the start position, carry out the required commands using the MDI, etc. If the program is run from the set block without carrying out these operations, there is a danger of interference with the machine or of machine operation at an unexpected speed, which may result in breakage of tools or machine tool or may cause damage to the operators. Under the constant surface speed control (during G96 modal), if the axis targeted for the constant surface speed control moves toward the spindle center, the spindle rotation speed will increase and may exceed the allowable speed of the workpiece or chuck, etc. In this case, the workpiece, etc. may jump out during machining, which may result in breakage of tools or machine tool or may cause damage to the operators.
CAUTION
1. Items related to product and manual
For items described as "Restrictions" or "Usable State" in this manual, the instruction manual issued by the machine maker takes precedence over this manual.
Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".
This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added. Confirm with the specifications issued by the machine maker before starting use.
Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine maker for details on each machine tool.
Some screens and functions may differ depending on the NC system (or its version), and some functions may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before use.
2. Items related to installation and assembly
Ground the signal cables to ensure stable system operation. Also ground the NC unit main frame, power distribution panel and machine to one point, so they all have the same potential.
If the control unit's rotary switch is set to "7", all data in the NC will be erased and the system will not start up.
3. Items related to preparation before use
Always set the stored stroke limit. Failure to set this could result in collision with the machine end.
Always turn the power OFF before connecting/disconnecting the I/O device cable. Failure to do so could damage the I/O device and NC unit.
4. Items related to screen operation
If the tool offset and workpiece coordinate system offset are changed during automatic operation (including during single block stop), they are validated from the command of the next block or blocks onwards.
When forcibly setting (forcibly outputting) data on the I/F diagnosis screen during machine operation, pay careful attention to the sequence operation.
All of the various data in the NC memory is erased when formatting. Be sure to use the transfer function to transfer all necessary data to another storage device before formatting.
Even if the tool compensation amount write command, parameter write command or variable data write command is executed with graphic check, the data will be actually written in, and the original data will be overwritten.
To prevent influence from data omission and data transformation in the communication circuit, always verify the data after inputting and outputting machining programs.
Do not change setup parameters without prior approval from the machine maker.
5. Items related to programming
Because of key chattering, etc., during editing, "NO NOS. FOLLOWING G" commands become a "G00" operation during running.
" ; " "EOB" and " % " "EOR" are explanatory notations. The actual codes are "Line feed" and "%" for ISO, and "End of Block" and "End of Record" for EIA.
Do not change the fixed cycle program without prior approval from the machine maker. (Continued on next page)
CAUTION
6. Items related to operation
Stay out of the moveable range of the machine during automatic operation. During rotation, keep hands, feet and face away from the spindle.
Carry out dry operation before actually machining, and confirm the machining program, tool offset and workpiece coordinate system offset.
If the operation start position is set from a block in the program and the program is started, the program before the set block is not executed. If there are coordinate system shift commands or M, S, T, and B commands before the block set as the starting position, carry out the required commands using the MDI, etc. There is a danger of interference with the machine if the operation is started from the set starting position block without carrying out these operations.
Program so the mirror image function is turned ON/OFF at the mirror image center. The mirror image center will deviate if the function is turned ON/OFF at a position other than the mirror image center.
7. Items related to faults and abnormalities
If a BATTERY FAULT alarm is issued, save the machining program, tool data and parameters before replacing the battery.
If the axis overruns or emits an abnormal noise, immediately press the emergency stop button and stop the axis movement.
8. Items related to maintenance
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector. Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the PCBs while the power is ON.
Do not connect the cable by pulling on the cable wire.
Do not short circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
Dispose the spent battery according to local laws.
Do not replace the control unit while the power is ON.
Do not replace the base I/O unit while the power is ON.
Do not replace the control section power supply PCB while the power is ON.
Do not replace the expansion PCB while the power is ON.
Do not replace the memory cassette while the power is ON.
Be careful that metal cutting chips, etc., do not come into contact with the connector contacts of the memory cassette.
Do not replace the high-speed program server unit while the power is ON.
Disposal
(Note) This symbol mark is for EU countries only. This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end- users and Annex II.
Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and components which can be recycled and/or reused. This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of separately from your household waste. If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol means that the battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be indicated as follows: Hg: mercury (0,0005%), Cd: cadmium (0,002%), Pb: lead (0,004%) In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators. Please, dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community waste collection/ recycling centre.
Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!
- i -
Contents I. OPERATION SECTION 1. Setting and Display Unit Operation.........................................................................................1
1.1 Appearance of Setting and Display Unit ...........................................................................1 1.2 Functions of Display Areas ...............................................................................................2 1.3 Screen Transition Diagram ...............................................................................................4
1.3.1 Screen Transition when Power Is Turned ON .........................................................4 1.3.2 Screen Transition Diagram (Lathe system) .............................................................5 1.3.3 Screen Transition Diagram (Machining center system) ...........................................7
1.4 Screen Selection Procedure .............................................................................................9 1.5 Data Setting Method .......................................................................................................13 1.6 Screen Saver/ Backlight OFF .........................................................................................17
2. Monitor..................................................................................................................................19 2.1 POSITION.......................................................................................................................20
2.1.1 Total Clear of Screen .............................................................................................23 2.1.2 Position Display Counter Zero and Origin Zero .....................................................23 2.1.3 Manual Numeric Command (S, T, M) ....................................................................24 2.1.4 Displaying Automatic Operation Program..............................................................27
2.2 COORDINATE................................................................................................................28 2.2.1 Correcting the Buffer..............................................................................................32
2.3 COMMAND.....................................................................................................................44 2.3.1 Execution Program Monitor ...................................................................................44 2.3.2 Execution Modal Monitor .......................................................................................45 2.3.3 Total Integrating Time Display ...............................................................................47
2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH .....................................................................................................48 2.4.1 Memory Search......................................................................................................49 2.4.2 Tape Search ..........................................................................................................51 2.4.3 Compare Stop........................................................................................................53
2.5 Resuming the Program...................................................................................................55 2.5.1 Operation Sequences for Program Restart............................................................58 2.5.2 Restart Search Operations ....................................................................................61 2.5.3 Restart Position Return System.............................................................................67 2.5.4 Manual Numeric Commands with Program Restart...............................................68 2.5.5 Checkpoints for Program Restart...........................................................................69
2.6 PLC SWITCH..................................................................................................................70 2.6.1 PLC Switch ON and OFF Operation ......................................................................70
2.7 COMMON VARIABLE.....................................................................................................71 2.7.1 Common Variable Display .....................................................................................72 2.7.2 Common Variable Setting ......................................................................................73 2.7.3 Common Variable Data Deleting ...........................................................................73
2.8 LOCAL VARIABLE..........................................................................................................74 2.8.1 Local Variable Data Display...................................................................................75
3 (I). Tool Offset (L system) ......................................................................................................77 3.1 Wear Data.......................................................................................................................78
3.1.1 Setting Tool Offset Data.........................................................................................79 3.1.2 Erasing the Tool Offset Data..................................................................................79 3.1.3 Tool Wear and Tool Length Data Setting Mode (incremental/absolute) ................80
3.2 Tool Length Data ............................................................................................................82 3.2.1 Manual Tool Length Measurement I ......................................................................83
- ii -
3.2.2 Manual Numeric Command Operation on the TOOL DATA Screen (M, T) ...........89 3.2.3 Manual Tool Length Measurement II .....................................................................90
3.3 Tool Nose Data...............................................................................................................97 3.4 Tool Life Management I (#1096 T_L type is 1) ...............................................................98
3.4.1 Tool Life Management Method ..............................................................................99 3.4.2 Conditions for Counting (incrementing) .................................................................99 3.4.3 Setting Tool Life Management Data ....................................................................100 3.4.4 Erasing Tool Life Management Data in Display Screen Units .............................100 3.4.5 Precautions ..........................................................................................................100
3.5 Tool Life Management II (#1096 T_Ltype is 2) .............................................................101 3.5.1 Group Registration...............................................................................................101 3.5.2 Tool Life Incrementation Methods........................................................................104 3.5.3 Parameters ..........................................................................................................106
3.6 Tool Registration...........................................................................................................107 3.6.1 Outline of Functions .............................................................................................107 3.6.2 Tool Registration in the Magazine Pot .................................................................107 3.6.3 Tool Registration in the Spindle, Standby and Indexing Areas............................108 3.6.4 Deleting Tool Registration Data ...........................................................................109 3.6.5 Manual Numeric Command Operation (M, T) on the TOOL
REGISTRATION Screen......................................................................................109 3 (II). Tool Offset (M system) ..................................................................................................111
3.1 Tool Offset ....................................................................................................................112 3.1.1 Tool Offset Data Setting.......................................................................................113 3.1.2 Tool Offset Data Clear .........................................................................................113 3.1.3 Tool Offset Data Setting Modes (Absolute and Incremental)...............................113 3.1.4 Manual Tool Length Measurement ......................................................................116 3.1.5 Manual Numeric Command Operation on the TOOL OFFSET Screen (M, T).....119
3.2 Tool Registration...........................................................................................................120 3.2.1 Function Outline...................................................................................................120 3.2.2 Tool Registration in Magazine Pot .......................................................................121 3.2.3 Tool Registration in HEAD, NEXT, and INDEX ...................................................122 3.2.4 Tool Registration Data Clear................................................................................122 3.2.5 Manual numeric Command Operation on the TOOL REGISTRATION
Screen (M, T).......................................................................................................123 3.3 Tool Life ........................................................................................................................124
3.3.1 Function Outline...................................................................................................124 3.3.2 TOOL LIFE Screen Data Display.........................................................................125 3.3.3 TOOL LIFE Data Display and Setting (TOOL LIFE Data Screen Page 2) ...........129 3.3.4 Clear of All TOOL LIFE Data (HEAD, NEXT, GROUP LIST Screen Page 1) ......130
4. Parameters (User) ..............................................................................................................131 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate ..................................................................................................132
4.1.1 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System Offset Data .............................................134 4.1.2 Setting External Workpiece Coordinate System Offset Data...............................134 4.1.3 Displaying Machine Position Data .......................................................................134 4.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement Function (L System).......................135 4.1.5 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement Function (M System)......................139 4.1.6 Workpiece position Measurement Function (M System) .....................................140
4.2 Machining Parameters..................................................................................................146 4.2.1 PROCESS PARAMERTER..................................................................................146 4.2.2 Control Parameters..............................................................................................153 4.2.3 Axis Parameters...................................................................................................155 4.2.4 Barrier Data..........................................................................................................157 4.2.5 Tool Measurement Parameter .............................................................................159
- iii -
4.3 I/O Parameters .............................................................................................................160 4.3.1 I/O BASE PARAM................................................................................................160 4.3.2 I/O DEVICE PARAM ............................................................................................162 4.3.3 COMPUTER LINK PARAMETER ........................................................................165
4.4 Setup Parameters.........................................................................................................168 4.5 BACKUP Screen...........................................................................................................169
4.5.1 Backup Operations ..............................................................................................170 4.5.2 Restoration Operations ........................................................................................171
5. Program..............................................................................................................................172 5.1 Function Outline............................................................................................................173 5.2 Menu Function ..............................................................................................................174
5.2.1 MDI Screen Menu Function .................................................................................174 5.2.2 EDIT Screen Menu Function................................................................................178
5.3 Program Edit Operation ................................................................................................180 5.3.1 Data Display Update (One Screen Scroll) ...........................................................180 5.3.2 Data Display Update (One Line Scroll) ................................................................181 5.3.3 Data Change........................................................................................................182 5.3.4 Data Insertion (
SHIFT
DELETE INS ) .....................................................................................183
5.3.5 Deletion of One Character (
DELETE INS )..........................................................................184
5.3.6 Deletion of One Block (
C.B CAN ) .................................................................................185
5.3.7 Deletion of Data on One Screen ..........................................................................186 5.4 MDI Screen Extension Operation .................................................................................187
5.4.1 MDI Data Registration in Memory (
MDI-ENT ) ...........................................................187 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation..................................................................................188
5.5.1 Edit Data Call (
SEARCH ) ..........................................................................................188 5.5.2 New Program Registration and Preparation ........................................................193
5.6 PLAYBACK...................................................................................................................195 5.6.1 Playback Operation..............................................................................................196 5.6.2 Edit Operation ......................................................................................................201 5.6.3 Limitations............................................................................................................202
5.7 Word Editing .................................................................................................................203 5.7.1 Handling of the Various Keys During Word Editing .............................................206 5.7.2 Searching Word Units ..........................................................................................207 5.7.3 Word Search ........................................................................................................208 5.7.4 Character String Search ......................................................................................209 5.7.5 Deleting Words ....................................................................................................210 5.7.6 Deleting Lines ......................................................................................................211 5.7.7 Replacing Words..................................................................................................212 5.7.8 Inserting Words....................................................................................................213 5.7.9 Copying Words ....................................................................................................215 5.7.10 Program .............................................................................................................216 5.7.11 Deleting Programs .............................................................................................217 5.7.12 Newly Creating Programs ..................................................................................218 5.7.13 Operation Search...............................................................................................219 5.7.14 B. G Search .......................................................................................................220 5.7.15 B. G Quit ............................................................................................................221 5.7.16 Comments..........................................................................................................221 5.7.17 Setting the Program Operation Start Position....................................................222
6. Data In/Out .........................................................................................................................223 6.1 DATA INPUT ................................................................................................................224
6.1.1 Change of Input and Comparison ........................................................................225 6.1.2 Machining Program Input.....................................................................................226
- iv -
6.1.3 Inputting Tool Offset Data ....................................................................................229 6.1.4 Inputting Parameter Data.....................................................................................230 6.1.5 Inputting Common Variables................................................................................231 6.1.6 Inputting History Data ..........................................................................................232 6.1.7 Inputting Waveform Data .....................................................................................233 6.1.8 Inputting Auxiliary Axis Parameter Data ..............................................................234
6.2 DATA OUTPUT.............................................................................................................235 6.2.1 Machining Program Output ..................................................................................237 6.2.2 Outputting Tool Offset Data .................................................................................241 6.2.3 Outputting Parameter Data ..................................................................................242 6.2.4 Outputting Common Variable Data ......................................................................245 6.2.5 Outputting History Data........................................................................................246 6.2.6 Outputting Waveform Data ..................................................................................247 6.2.7 Outputting Auxiliary Axis Parameter Data............................................................248
6.3 PROGRAM ERASE ......................................................................................................251 6.4 PROGRAM COPY ........................................................................................................256
6.4.1 Machining Program Copy ....................................................................................257 6.4.2 Machining Program Condense ............................................................................259 6.4.3 Machining Program Merge...................................................................................260 6.4.4 Changing the Machining Program Number..........................................................262
6.5 PROGRAM FILE...........................................................................................................263 6.6 RS-232C I/O Device Connection ..................................................................................265
6.6.1 Connection of Tape Reader, Tape Puncher, Printer, FLD...................................265 6.7 Data Protection .............................................................................................................266
6.7.1 Data Protection Key .............................................................................................266 6.7.2 Edit Lock B, C ......................................................................................................268
7. Diagnosis ............................................................................................................................270 7.1 ALARM MESSAGE.......................................................................................................271
7.1.1 Tracing of Alarm and Stop Codes........................................................................271 7.2 SERVO MONITOR .......................................................................................................273
7.2.1 Servo Monitor.......................................................................................................273 7.2.2 Servo Monitor (2) .................................................................................................274 7.2.3 Servo Diagnosis...................................................................................................275 7.2.4 Servo Diagnosis (2) .............................................................................................276 7.2.5 PW Diagnosis ......................................................................................................277 7.2.6 Display Items for the Synchronous Error .............................................................278
7.3 SPINDLE MONITOR.....................................................................................................280 7.4 PLC Interface Diagnosis ...............................................................................................284
7.4.1 PLC-I/F Setting and Display.................................................................................284 7.4.2 PLC Device Data Display.....................................................................................286 7.4.3 PLC Interface Signal Forcible Definition (Single-shot Type)................................287 7.4.4 PLC Interface Signal Forcible Definition (Modal Type) ........................................288 7.4.5 Diagnosis Executed When an Emergency Stop Status Occurs...........................289
7.5 Absolute Position Monitor .............................................................................................290 7.5.1 ABS SERVO MONITOR ......................................................................................290 7.5.2 Absolute Position Initialization .............................................................................291
7.6 Adjustment....................................................................................................................293 7.6.1 Adjustment Preparation .......................................................................................293 7.6.2 Automatic Analog Output Adjustment ..................................................................293 7.6.3 Adjustment Procedure .........................................................................................294 7.6.4 Parameter Input/Output .......................................................................................295
7.7 OPERATION HISTORY................................................................................................296
- v -
7.8 Configuration ................................................................................................................297 7.8.1 S/W MODULE TREE ...........................................................................................297 7.8.2 H/W MONITOR ....................................................................................................297 7.8.3 Option ..................................................................................................................298
7.9 Auxiliary Axis Parameter...............................................................................................299 7.9.1 Auxiliary Axis Parameter Screen .........................................................................299 7.9.2 Backup.................................................................................................................300
7.10 Auxiliary Axis Monitor .................................................................................................304 7.10.1 Alarm History Display.........................................................................................305 7.10.2 Auxiliary Axis Adjustment Function....................................................................305 7.10.3 Operation Method for the Auxiliary Axis Adjustment Function...........................308
7.11 MELDASNET Support Parameters.............................................................................311 7.12 NC Data Sampling ......................................................................................................314 7.13 Anshin-net...................................................................................................................315 7.14 MTB net ......................................................................................................................316
8. High-speed Program Server ...............................................................................................317 8.1 Host Setting ..................................................................................................................318
8.1.1 Setting the User Name.........................................................................................319 8.1.2 Setting the Password ...........................................................................................319 8.1.3 Designating the Directory.....................................................................................320 8.1.4 Setting the Host Address .....................................................................................320 8.1.5 Inputting a comment ............................................................................................321
8.2 Host (Compatible with M60 Series) ..............................................................................322 8.2.1 Displaying the File List .........................................................................................323 8.2.2 Downloading (IC to host) .....................................................................................324 8.2.3 Uploading (Host to IC) .........................................................................................325
8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series) ............................................................................326 8.3.1 Host Communication Screen ...............................................................................326 8.3.2 File Selection Screen...........................................................................................329 8.3.3 NC Data File Name..............................................................................................331 8.3.4 Using the Host Communication Screen ...............................................................332 8.3.5 Using the File Selection Screen...........................................................................337
8.4 IC Card .........................................................................................................................340 8.4.1 Inputting a Machining Program from the IC Card (IC to NC) ...............................341 8.4.2 Outputting a Machining Program to the IC Card (NC to IC).................................342 8.4.3 Erasing a Machining Program in the IC Card ......................................................343 8.4.4 Formatting the IC Card ........................................................................................344 8.4.5 Searching for a Machining Program in the IC Card .............................................345 8.4.6 Listing the Machining Programs in the IC Card ...................................................346
9. Graphics .............................................................................................................................347 9.1 Outline of Functions......................................................................................................347 9.2 Menu Function ..............................................................................................................348 9.3 Use of the Trace Mode (
TRACE ).....................................................................................350 9.4 Use of the Check Modes ..............................................................................................351 9.5 GRF MODE (
GRF MODE ) ......................................................................................................359
9.6 SCALE (
SCALE ) .............................................................................................................361 9.6.1 Changing the Scale..............................................................................................361 9.6.2 Changing the Display Position .............................................................................362
9.7 STANDARD (
STANDARD ) .....................................................................................................366 9.8 ROTATION (
ROTATION ) (M system)....................................................................................367 9.9 ERASE (
ERASE ) .............................................................................................................368 9.10 PROGRAM (
PROGRAM ).....................................................................................................369
- vi -
10. Ladder Circuit Monitor [for PLC built-in specification only] ...............................................370 10.1 Parameter Setting.......................................................................................................370
11. Visual Analyzer (Waveform display) .................................................................................371 11.1 Menu Function ............................................................................................................373 11.2 Synchronous Tap Error Display..................................................................................374
II. MACHINE OPERATION MANUAL 1. Operation State .........................................................................................................................2
1.1 Operation State Transition Diagram .................................................................................2 1.2 Power OFF .......................................................................................................................2 1.3 Run Not Ready .................................................................................................................3 1.4 Ready ...............................................................................................................................3
1.4.1 Reset........................................................................................................................3 1.4.2 Automatic Operation Start........................................................................................3 1.4.3 Automatic Operation Pause .....................................................................................4 1.4.4 Automatic Operation Stop........................................................................................4
2. Indicator Lamps.........................................................................................................................4 2.1 Control Unit Ready ...........................................................................................................4 2.2 Automatic Operation Busy ................................................................................................4 2.3 Automatic Operation Start Busy .......................................................................................4 2.4 Automatic Operation Pause Busy.....................................................................................4 2.5 Return to Reference Position............................................................................................5 2.6 Alarm ................................................................................................................................5 2.7 M00...................................................................................................................................5 2.8 M02/M30...........................................................................................................................5
3. Reset Switch and Emergency Stop Button ...............................................................................6 3.1 Reset Switch.....................................................................................................................6 3.2 Emergency Stop Button....................................................................................................6
4. Operation Mode.........................................................................................................................7 4.1 Mode Selection Switch .....................................................................................................7 4.2 Jog Feed Mode.................................................................................................................7 4.3 Rapid Traverse Feed Mode ..............................................................................................8 4.4 Return to Reference Position Mode..................................................................................9 4.5 Incremental Feed Mode..................................................................................................11 4.6 Handle Feed Mode .........................................................................................................12 4.7 Memory Mode.................................................................................................................13 4.8 MDI Operation Mode ......................................................................................................14
5. Operation Panel Switches in Operation Mode ........................................................................15 5.1 Rapid Traverse Override ................................................................................................15 5.2 Cutting Feed Override ....................................................................................................15 5.3 Manual Feedrate.............................................................................................................15 5.4 Handle/Incremental Feed Magnification Factor ..............................................................16 5.5 Handle Feed Axis Selection............................................................................................16 5.6 Manual Pulse Generator.................................................................................................16 5.7 Cycle Start and Feed Hold..............................................................................................17 5.8 Feed Axis Selection ........................................................................................................17
6. Operation Panel Switch Functions ..........................................................................................18 6.1 Chamfering .....................................................................................................................18 6.2 Miscellaneous Function Lock..........................................................................................18 6.3 Single Block ....................................................................................................................18
- vii -
6.4 Dry Run...........................................................................................................................18 6.5 Manual Override .............................................................................................................18 6.6 Override Cancel ..............................................................................................................19 6.7 Optional Stop ..................................................................................................................19 6.8 Optional Block Skip.........................................................................................................19 6.9 Manual Absolute .............................................................................................................20 6.10 Error Detect ..................................................................................................................21 6.11 Follow-up Function .......................................................................................................21 6.12 Axis Removal ................................................................................................................21 6.13 Manual/Automatic Synchronous Feed..........................................................................21 6.14 Handle Interruption .......................................................................................................22
6.14.1 Outline..................................................................................................................22 6.14.2 Interruptible Conditions ........................................................................................22 6.14.3 Interruption Effective Axis ....................................................................................22 6.14.4 Axis Movement Speed Resulting from Interruption..............................................23 6.14.5 Path Resulting after Handle Interruption..............................................................24 6.14.6 Handle Interruption in Tool Radius Compensation ..............................................26 6.14.7 Interrupt Amount Reset........................................................................................28 6.14.8 Operation Sequence ............................................................................................28
6.15 Machine Lock................................................................................................................29 6.16 Deceleration Check ......................................................................................................30
6.16.1 Functions .............................................................................................................30 6.16.2 Deceleration Check Method.................................................................................30 6.16.3 Deceleration Check when Opposite Direction Movement is Reversed................33 6.16.4 Parameters ..........................................................................................................34 6.16.5 Precautions ..........................................................................................................35
III. SETUP 1. Switches ....................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Layout Diagram of the Control Unit Rotary Switch ...........................................................1 2. Start up and Adjustment Procedure ..........................................................................................5
2.1 Confirmation of Connections ............................................................................................5 2.2 Setting of Various Switches ..............................................................................................5 2.3 Turning Power ON, Memory Initialization and Parameter Settings...................................7
3. Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Point Return ......................................................................8 3.1 Outline ..............................................................................................................................8 3.2 Dog-type Reference Point Return.....................................................................................8 3.3 Reference Point Return Parameters...............................................................................10 3.4 Dog-type Reference Point Return Adjustment Procedures ............................................15
4. Absolute Position Detection System .......................................................................................16 4.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................16 4.2 Coordinate System of Absolute Position System............................................................16 4.3 Starting up Absolute Position Detection System ............................................................17
5. Stored Stroke Limit..................................................................................................................28 5.1 Stored stroke limit I .........................................................................................................30 5.2 Stored stroke limit II ........................................................................................................31 5.3 Stored stroke limit IB.......................................................................................................33 5.4 Stored stroke limit IC ......................................................................................................33 5.5 Movable Range during Inclined Axis Control ..................................................................34 5.6 Stored Stroke Limit for Rotation Axis ..............................................................................35 5.7 Precautions.....................................................................................................................36
- viii -
6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance................................................37 6.1 Maintenance Tools .........................................................................................................37 6.2 Maintenance Items .........................................................................................................37
6.2.1 Escutcheon ............................................................................................................38 6.2.2 LCD Panel..............................................................................................................38 6.2.3 ATA Memory Card .................................................................................................39
6.3 Replacement Methods....................................................................................................40 6.3.1 Cable......................................................................................................................40 6.3.2 Durable Parts .........................................................................................................42 6.3.3 Unit.........................................................................................................................45 6.3.4 Control PCB...........................................................................................................47 6.3.5 Memory Cassette...................................................................................................49 6.3.6 High-speed Program Server ..................................................................................51
7. Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................................52 7.1 Confirmation of Trouble State.........................................................................................52 7.2 When in Trouble .............................................................................................................53
8. Maintenance Functions ...........................................................................................................57 8.1 Data Input/Output Function.............................................................................................57
8.1.1 Data Format ...........................................................................................................58 8.1.2 Data Output............................................................................................................61 8.1.3 Data Input and Compare........................................................................................65 8.1.4 Parameter Backup .................................................................................................70
8.2 Data Sampling ................................................................................................................71 8.2.1 Specifications.........................................................................................................71 8.2.2 Operation Procedures............................................................................................72 8.2.3 Setting and Display Items ......................................................................................73 8.2.4 Data Output Procedures ........................................................................................79
IV. APPENDIXES Appendix 1 List of Function Codes .............................................................................................1 Appendix 2 Table of Command Value Ranges...........................................................................2 Appendix 3 Circular Cutting Radius Error...................................................................................3 Appendix 4 Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program ..........................................................4
4.1 Fixed Cycle Operation Parameters...................................................................................4 4.2 Inputting the Fixed Cycle Program ...................................................................................4 4.3 Outputting the Fixed Cycle Program.................................................................................4 4.4 Erasing the Fixed Cycle Program .....................................................................................4 4.5 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For L system)...........................................................5 4.6 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For M system)........................................................15
Appendix 5 RS-232C I/O Device Parameter Setting Examples and Cable Connection...........20 Appendix 6 Data Input/Output Data List ...................................................................................21 Appendix 7 Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit .................................................23
I. OPERATION SECTION
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.1 Appearance of Setting and Display Unit
I-1
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation
1.1 Appearance of Setting and Display Unit The setting and display unit consists of a display unit (9-inch umber color), keys, and menu keys, as illustrated below:
(1) Appearance of the CT100 Setting and Display Unit ... Example of key layout for machining center system
(Separate types FCUA-CR10+KB10 and FCUA-EL10+KB10 are similar.)
MITSUBISHI READY
MONI- TOR
TOOL PARAM
EDIT MDI
DIAGN IN/OUT
SFG F0
O A
N B
G C
X U
Y V
Z W
F E
D L
H I
P \
Q J
R K
M (
S )
T [
?
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0 S P
DELETE INS
CB CA N
SHIFT
INPUT CALC
RESET
- +
. ,
EOB ]
= #
/ *
READY LED Alphabetic character, numerical character, and symbol keys Setting keys Function selection keys
CRT/EL display
Page keys
Menu keys Reset key Cursor keys Data correction keys
Input key (calculation) Shift key
(2) Appearance of the CT120 Setting and Display Unit ... Example of key layout for lathe system
MITSUBISHI READY
MONI- TOR
TOOL PARAM
EDIT MDI
DIAGN IN/OUT
SFG F0
O A
N B
G C
X U
Y V
Z W
F E
D L
H I
P \
Q J
R K
M (
S )
T [
?
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0 S P
DELETE INS
CB CA N
SHIFT
INPUT CALC
RESET
- +
. ,
EOB ]
= #
/ *
(Note 1) To enter the letter or symbol on the lower right of an alphabetic or symbol key, press the
corresponding key while holding down the
SHIFT key.
(Example) Pressing the
O A while holding down the
SHIFT key types letter "A".
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.2 Functions of Display Areas
I-2
1.2 Functions of Display Areas Screen display is divided into the following four areas: (1) Data display area (2) Operation status mode and alarm message area (3) Menu display area (4) Setting area and key operation message area
.......Function....... name
Data display area
Key operation message area..........
...Setting area........................................................................................................
...Operation status mode/alarm display area.........................................................
...Menu display area..............................................................................................
1. MONITOR 3. 1/4
System name display When using the 2-system, the system name will be displayed here for screens that can be set and displayed per system. The name set in parameter "#1169 system name" will display. The systems can be switched over by pressing
$ .
Maximum number of pages
Page number
Menu number
Function name
Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 MENU ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 ST5 ST6 ST7 ST8 Operation mode
Operation status mode display and menu display (during normal operation)
Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Alarm 1 (19 characters)
Alarm message display (during alarm occurrence) Alarm 2 (19 characters)
This is displayed when 6 or more menus exist.
The selected menu is reverse- displayed.
Alarm is highlighted and message (warning) is normally displayed.
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.2 Functions of Display Areas
I-3
Explanation of operation status display
Position Display symbol Explanation ST1 EMG During emergency stop RST During reset LSK When paper tape reader is in label skip state HLD During feed hold stop STP During single block stop Normal operation state other than the above ST2 mm Metric command in. Inch command ST3 ABS Absolute command mode G90 INC Incremental command mode G91 ST4 This indicates that subprogram is not executed.
SB1 SB4
Machining program execution is controlled according to subprogram data. Each value of 1 to 4 indicates the subprogram depth.
ST5 G54 G59
Selection of the workpiece coordinate system is indicated.
ST6 G40 Tool radius compensation cancel state G41 During tool R compensation (left) G42 During tool R compensation (right) ST7 fix Fixed cycle is being executed. PR State in which power must be rebooted to validate set parameter. State other than the above. ST8
(Note 1) denotes blank display.
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.3 Screen Transition Diagram
I-4
1.3 Screen Transition Diagram 1.3.1 Screen Transition when Power Is Turned ON
MONI- TOR etc.
Power ON
O1234 N12345 X -12000.000 M3 Y -3400.000 S100 Z -560.000 T12 N1 N2
MONITOR 1
Blank screen
Title screen
SHIFT
C.B CAN
Display screen
(1) When the power is turned ON, the "Title" screen is displayed. To select a display screen on the "Title"
screen, press the corresponding "function selection" key. (2) To select a blank screen on a display screen, select the "MONITOR 1" screen and press
SHIFT key, then
C.B CAN key.
To select a display screen on the "blank screen", press the corresponding "function selection" key.
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.3 Screen Transition Diagram
I-5
1.3.2 Screen Transition Diagram (Lathe system) Screens with a
$ mark will change between systems if the
$ key is pressed when using the 2-system.
$
$
MDI
$
$
MONI- TOR
POSITION COORDINATE
COMMAND MODAL
INFORM. TIME
RESERCH
PLC
SWITCH
COMMON VARIABLE
LOCAL
VARIABLE
PROGRAM SEARCH
$
$
$
TOOL PARAM
NOSE-R
TOOL LIFE
DATA
$
TOOL TIP OFFSET
TOOL DATA
I/O BASE PARAM
SETUP PARAM
BACKUP
SERVO PARAM
SPINDLE PARAM
BASE SPEC. PARAM
AXIS
SPEC. PARAM
$
MACRO
FILE
PSW
$
MC-ERR.
CMP.
PLC
TIMER
#1000
#9000
#2000 #2200 #3000
#4000,#5000 #6000 #7000 #7000
The setting can be displayed when SETUP PARAM is selected.
EDIT MDI
MDI
EDIT
MDI-ENT
PROGRAM
SMALL LARGE
FILE
SEARCH
DIAGN IN/OUT
SPINDLE MONITOR
PLC-I/F
ALARM
MESSAGE
SERVO MONITOR
SERVO DIAGNOSIS
ABS SERVO MONITOR
ABS. POSITION SET
SUPPORT
AUX-PRM
AUX-MON
ERASE
FILE
INPUT
OUTPUT
COPY
IC CARD
HOST SET
HOST
ADJUST
S-ANALOG
OPERATION
HISTORY
CONFIG
[MENU 1] [MENU 2] [MENU 3] [MENU 4] [MENU 5] [MENU 6] [MENU 7] [MENU 8]
#8000
EDIT
$ $
$
$
WORK
PROCESS CONTROL
AXIS BARRIER
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.3 Screen Transition Diagram
I-6
SFG
MACRO
CONTROL
PROGRAM
ERASE
TRACE
STEP
OPERATION
SEARCH
ERASE
CHECK
MAC-PAR
LIST
STANDARD
GRF
MODE
ROTATION
SCALE
OFF
ON
PARAMETER #1217/0
F0
VISUAL
ANALYZER
LADDER
MONITOR
APLC
ON
OFF
PARAMETER #1222/2
ON
OFF
PARAMETER #6451/0
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.3 Screen Transition Diagram
I-7
1.3.3 Screen Transition Diagram (Machining center system) Screens with a
$ mark will change between systems if the
$ key is pressed when using the 2-system.
$
$
$
MONI- TOR POSITION COORDINATE
COMMAND MODAL
INFORM. TIME
RESERCH
PLC
SWITCH
COMMON VARIABLE
LOCAL
VARIABLE
PROGRAM SEARCH
$
$
$
$
TOOL PARAM
TOOL LIFE
DATA
TOOL
OFFSET
T-
REGIST- RATION
I/O BASE PARAM
SETUP PARAM
BACKUP
WORK
PROCESS CONTROL
AXIS BARRIER
BASE SPEC. PARAM
AXIS
SPEC. PARAM
$
MACRO
FILE
PSW
$
MC-ERR.
CMP.
PLC
TIMER
#1000
#9000
#2000 #2200 #3000
#4000,#5000 #6000 #7000 #7000
EDIT MDI
MDI
EDIT
MDI-ENT
PROGRAM
SMALL LARGE
FILE
SEARCH
DIAGN IN/OUT
SPINDLE MONITOR
PLC-I/F
ALARM
MESSAGE
SERVO MONITOR
SERVO DIAGNOSIS
ABS SERVO MONITOR
ABS. POSITION SET
SUPPORT
AUX-PRM
AUX-MON
ERASE
FILE
INPUT
OUTPUT
COPY
IC CARD
HOST SET
HOST
ADJUST
S-ANALOG
OPERATION
HISTORY
CONFIG
[MENU 1] [MENU 2] [MENU 3] [MENU 4] [MENU 5] [MENU 6]
#8000
SPINDLE PARAM
SERVO PARAM
MDI
EDIT
[MENU 7] [MENU 8]
$ $
$
The setting can be displayed when SETUP PARAM is selected.
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.3 Screen Transition Diagram
I-8
SFG
MACRO
CONROL
PROGRAM
ERASE
TRACE
STEP
OPERATION
SEARCH
ERASE
CHECK
MAC-PAR
LIST
STANDARD
RANGE
GRF
MODE
ROTATION
SCALE
OFF
ON
PARAMETER #1217/0
F0
VISUAL
ANALYZER
LADDER
MONITOR
APLC
ON
OFF
PARAMETER #1222/2
ON
OFF
PARAMETER #6451/0
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.4 Screen Selection Procedure
I-9
1.4 Screen Selection Procedure The following operation methods are based on using the exclusive setting and display unit.
Select a screen according to the following procedure: (1) Select a function screen by using the appropriate function key. (2) Select a menu screen in the function by using the appropriate menu key. (3) Select a page in the menu screen by using the page key.
FUNCTION
MENU
Page
First page
Page Page
Menu 1
Menu 2
Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6
Menu 7
Menu 8
1.1 screen
2.1 screen
3.1 screen
4.1 screen
5.1 screen
6.1 screen
7.1 screen
8.1 screen
5.2 screen
6.2 screen
1.3 screen
6.3 screen
6.4 screen
4.2 screen
1.2 screen
2.2 screen
8.2 screen
Second page
Third page
Fourth page
(1) Select a function screen.
MONI- TOR
TOOL
PARAM
EDIT MDI
DIAGN IN/OUT
SFG
F0
Press the function selection key corresponding to the function screen to be displayed. (Example) Press the
MONI- TOR key.
1) The previously displayed menu screen is
displayed in the data display area. 2) The first display screen after power is turned
ON is the screen on the first menu.
If the same function selection key is again pressed, a return is made to the first page screen of the first menu. (Example) Again press the
MONI- TOR key.
POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU
[PROGRAM SEARCH] MONITOR 4.1/4 O12345678 N12345-12 O 1000 N 200-30 [PROGRAM FILE] 100 1500 50000 1234567 200 2000 70000 2000000 300 3000 123456 3000000 400 7000 200000 4000000 1234 10000 300000 5000000 [COL.BLOCK]
O N - N20 G91 G28X0 Y0 Z0; O( )N( )-( ) TAPE( )
[POSITION] 12/14 13:27 MONITOR 1 O12345678 N12345-12 O 1000 N 200-30 S 12345 ( 2000) #1 T 1234 M 12 #1 Fc 12000.00
G00 X-345.67 Y345.67; T1234; N100 S5000 M3; N200 G00 Z-100;
X -12345.678
Y 12345.678
Z 0.000
C 0.000
POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.4 Screen Selection Procedure
I-10
(2) Select a menu screen in the function. Up to five menus are displayed at a time. When a menu key below the menu display is pressed, the
menu screen corresponding to the menu key is displayed.
Press the menu key corresponding to the menu display.
Menu display
Menu key
POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU
1) The selected menu screen is displayed in the data display area.
2) The selected menu is highlighted in the menu display area.
POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU
[PROGRAM SEARCH] MONITOR 4.1/4 O12345678 N12345-12 O 1000 N 200-30 [PROGRAM FILE] 100 1500 50000 1234567 200 2000 70000 2000000 300 3000 123456 3000000 400 7000 200000 4000000 500 10000 300000 5000000 [COL.BLOCK]
O N - N20 G91 G28X0 Y0 Z0; O( )N( )-( ) TAPE( )
When the rightmost menu in the menu display area is "MENU", it indicates that other menus than the
displayed menus exist. Make menu change by pressing the menu key below "MENU", then select the menu screen to be displayed.
Press the
MENU key.
POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU
(1)
1) Only the menu display area is changed and the remaining menu group is displayed.
RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU
[PROGRAM SEARCH] MONITOR 4.1/4 O12345678 N12345-12 O 1000 N 200-30 [PROGRAM FILE] 100 1500 50000 1234567 200 2000 70000 2000000 300 3000 123456 3000000 400 7000 200000 4000000 500 10000 300000 5000000 [COL. BLOCK]
O N - N20 G91 G28X0 Y0 Z0; O( )N( )-( ) TAPE( )
Press the menu key corresponding to the
menu display. RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU
(2)
RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU
[COMMON VARIABLE] MONITOR 7.1/11 # 110 100 -123456.7890 111 101 12.3456 112 102 113 103 114 104 115 105 116 106 117 107 118 108 119 109
#( )DATA( )NAME( )
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.4 Screen Selection Procedure
I-11
When the screen selection menu is selected, the screen that mark is displayed after the menu means that the operation menu exists.
Press the menu key corresponding to the menu display.
T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU
(1)
1) The selected menu screen is displayed in the data display area.
2) The selected menu is highlighted and mark is displayed after the menu.
T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE NENU
[NOSE-R] TOOL 3.1/4 #1 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 0 2 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 0 3 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 0 : : : : : :
#( ) R( ) r( ) P( )
Press the menu key again.
(2)
T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU
1) The operation menu is displayed in the menu display area.
+INPUT =INPUT RETURN
[NOSE-R] TOOL 3.1/4 #1 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 0 2 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 0 3 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 0 : : : : : :
#( ) R( ) r( ) P( )
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.4 Screen Selection Procedure
I-12
(3) Select a page in the menu screen. When the menu screen contains a number of pages, feed pages by using the page key, the rightmost
page key (
NEXT ) is the "next page" screen selection key. The leftmost page key (
BACK ) is the "previous page" screen selection key.
Using the rightmost key
NEXT , feed page.
Using the leftmost key
BACK , feed page.
# 1 #1
#10 #20
#21 #31
#30 #40
#41 #51
#50 #60
First page Second page Third page Fourth page Fifth page
#81 #91
#90 #100
#61 #71
#70 #80
to to to to to to to to to to
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.5 Data Setting Method
I-13
1.5 Data Setting Method
(1) Outline of data setting The data setting method consists
mainly of the following steps: (1) Enter the data number. (2) Move the cursor. (3) Press data keys. (4) Press the INPUT key.
When a screen is selected, the cursor is displayed in the right end within the first parentheses in the setting area.
RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU
[COMMON VARIABLE] MONITOR 7.1/11 # 110 100 -123456.7890 111 101 12.3456 112 102 113 103 114 104 115 105 116 106 117 107 118 108 119 109 #( )DATA( )NAME( ) Data setting
area
Cursor
(1) Enter the data number.
Enter the number of the data to be set by using the numeric keys. (Example) To set data in #104, press
1
0
4 .
RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU
#( 104 )DATA( )NAME( )
(2) Move the cursor.
To move the cursor to the next parentheses, press the
key.
RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU
#( 104 )DATA( )NAME( )
(3) Press data keys.
Seeing the data display area contents, enter new data by using the keys. (Example) To change to 12.345, press
1
2
3
4
5 .
RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU
#( 104 )DATA( 12.345 )NAME( )
(4) Press the INPUT key.
Check the setup contents displayed in the setting area and set the data in memory by pressing the
INPUT key.
1) Data setting processing is performed according to the setting area contents, and the result is displayed in the data display area.
2) The data number in the setting area is incremented by one, and the cursor is displayed in the right end within the second parentheses.
After the last data number is input, it is not displayed. At this time, the cursor is displayed in the right end of the first parentheses.
RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU
[COMMON VARIABLE] MONITOR 7.1/11 # 110 100 -123456.7890 111 101 12.3456 112 102 113 103 114 104 115 105 116 106 117 107 118 108 119 109 #( 105)DATA( )NAME( )
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.5 Data Setting Method
I-14
3) To consecutively set data, repeat (3) and (4). 4) To change the data number, press the
INPUT key. The number is incremented by one. When the
key is pressed, the number is incremented by one. When the
key is pressed, the number is decremented by one. The data number can also be directly changed by moving the cursor to the data number setting area.
(Note 1) Data in the setting area is only displayed on the screen and is not set in memory until the
INPUT key is pressed. If the screen is changed before the
INPUT key is pressed, the data in the setting area becomes invalid.
(2) Cursor control and operation examples 1) Data write into the display screen (by keying) is made at the position indicated by the cursor. When
the cursor is not displayed, keying is not effective. Data ( )
Cursor This position enables keying.
2) When any key is pressed, already displayed data is moved one column to the left and the data corresponding to the key pressed at the cursor position is displayed.
DATA ( 12) When
3 is pressed, DATA ( 123)
3) If a number of parentheses exist in the data setting area, pressing the
key when the cursor is in the right end within a parenthesis causes the cursor to move to the right end within the next pair.
When the
key is pressed, the cursor is moved to the right end within the next parentheses.
# ( ) DATA ( )
When the
SHIFT
key are pressed, the cursor is moved to the preceding parentheses.
# ( ) DATA ( )
4) When the
DELETE INS key is pressed, the data at the cursor position is deleted. To cancel one character
entered by using any data key, etc., use the
DELETE INS key.
If you press
3 ,
3 by mistake, # ( 12) DATA ( 1233)
If you once press the
DELETE INS key, # ( 12) DATA ( 123)
If you again press the
DELETE INS key, # ( 12) DATA ( 12)
Each time the
DELETE INS key is pressed, one character of data at the cursor position is deleted and the
data to the left of the deleted character is moved one column to the right.
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.5 Data Setting Method
I-15
5) Data in parentheses where the cursor exists is erased by pressing the
C.B CAN key.
Display is made in the setting area as shown in the right. # ( 10) DATA ( 12.345)
If you press the
C.B CAN key, # ( 10) DATA ( )
6) Data in all parentheses in the setting area is erased by pressing
SHIFT
C.B CAN .
Display is made in the setting area as shown in the right.
If you press
SHIFT
C.B CAN ,
# ( 10) DATA ( 12.345)
# ( ) DATA ( )
7) The cursor in parentheses is moved one column to the left or right by pressing the
or
key desired character of data entered by using the data keys can be corrected.
Display is made in the setting area as shown in the right.
If you make successive four strokes of the
key,
If you press
3 ,
# ( 10) DATA ( 12.345)
# ( 10) DATA ( 12.345)
# ( 10) DATA ( 13.345)
2 is corrected to 3 and the cursor is moved one column to the right.
If you press the
key, # ( 10) DATA ( 13.345)
The cursor is only moved one column to the right.
If you press
0 SP
0 SP
0 SP , # ( 10) DATA ( 13.000)
The character at the cursor position is rewritten and the cursor is also moved one column to the right.
Data is corrected in sequence. (Note 1) If
is pressed when the cursor exists in the right end within one parenthesis, the cursor is moved to the right end within the following parenthesis part; if
is pressed when the cursor exists in the left end within one parenthesis, the cursor is moved to the right end within the preceding parentheses.
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.5 Data Setting Method
I-16
8) When the
SHIFT
keys are pressed, the cursor is moved to the right end within the following parentheses.
# ( 123) DATA ( 234) If you press the
SHIFT
key, the cursor is moved to the right end within the preceding parentheses.
# ( 123) DATA ( 234) If you press the
SHIFT
key, the cursor is moved to the right end within the following parentheses.
(3) Miscellaneous information 1) Data can also be set by other special methods. See the appropriate items. (For example, manual
numeric command setting is performed by the reverse display setting method.) 2) If an invalid key is pressed when data is set within parentheses, a "setting error" will occur at input
time and the data will not be accepted. Again set correct data from the beginning.
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.6 Screen Saver / Backlight OFF
I-17
1.6 Screen Saver / Backlight OFF
The screen saver function protects the display unit by turning OFF the screen after the time set in the parameters has elapsed. The screen can also be turned OFF with key operations on the POSITION screen. The backlight OFF function turns OFF the backlight in order to extend the life of the LCD screens backlight. The screen can be turned ON by pressing any of the keys on the key operation panel.
(1) Turning the screen OFF
(a) Screen Saver
If there is no key operation or a screen display request signal input from the machine within the time set in the parameter (#8078 Screen Saver Time), the screen will be turned OFF. If the parameter is set to 0, the screen will not be turned OFF.
The screen can turn OFF by pressing the
SHIFT and
C.B CAN keys on the POSITION screen. Even if the
parameter is set to 0, the screen can be turned OFF by pressing the
SHIFT and
C.B CAN keys.
(Note) The screen will not be turned OFF even if the
SHIFT and
C.B CAN keys are pressed on a screen
other than the POSITION screen.
(b) Backlight OFF
When the Screen Sever function works, the backlight turns OFF.
(2) Turning the screen ON
If a key is pressed or the screen display request signal is input while the screen is OFF, the screen will turn ON. (If an LCD is used, the backlight will also turn ON.) When a function select key is pressed, the screen will turn ON (the backlight will also turn ON for an LCD), and each key function will be executed. When alphanumeric or symbol key is pressed:
1 Only screen is turned ON
Z Only screen is turned ON * The following keys are also included. (
INPUT /
/
C.B CAN /
DELETE INS )
When a function select key is pressed:
MONI- TOR Screen turns ON and screen shifts
(Note) If a key is pressed or the screen display request signal is input while the screen is ON,
counting of the time to turn the screen OFF will restart.
1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.6 Screen Saver / Backlight OFF
I-18
(3) Setting the parameters
# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8078 Screen Saver Set the time to turn the screen OFF.
The screen saver will not turn ON if 0 is set. 0 to 60 (min) 0: Do not turn screen
OFF. (4) Target display units
This screen saver function is valid with the following display units. (a) 9-type CRT/9.5-type EL (b) 7.2-type/10.4-type monochrome LCD (c) 10.4-type color LCD (Note1) The display unit in (a) is valid only when the screen is turned OFF by the
SHIFT and
C.B CAN keys on
the POSITION screen. (Note2) The display units in (b) and (c) have a backlight which is turned ON/OFF.
(5) Precautions (a) If the screen is turned OFF while keys can be operated on the EDIT screen, etc., and an
alphanumeric, symbol or INPUT key is pressed, the first key will be handled as that for turning the screen ON. The key will not be input.
(b) If the function key, menu key, page key or system changeover key is pressed while the screen is OFF, the screen corresponding to the pressed key will turn ON.
(c) The screen will not turn ON even if the reset key is pressed. However, if the screen display request signal is input when the reset key is pressed, the screen will turn ON. Refer to the instruction manual issued by each machine maker for details. Note that whether the screen will turn ON when any of the machine operation board keys (other than the NC operation board keys) is pressed will differ according to the machine specifications. Refer to the instruction manual issued by each machine maker for details.
(d) Correspondence of
SHIFT key. The screen will not turn ON when just the
SHIFT key is pressed.
2. Monitor
I-19
2. Monitor When the function selection key
MONI- TOR is pressed, the following menu appears:
POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU
MONITOR menu display (No.5 to 8) (No.1 to 4)
Menu selection keysPrevious page key Next page key
RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU
PROGRAM FILE
SEARCH
PROGRAM FILE
SEARCH
TIME
COM-VAR
MODAL
INFORM.
MONITOR menu display No.1 to 4
POSITION X M Y S Z T
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
MENU
PLC-SW
COM-VAR
COORDI
POSITION, DIS TO GO, WORK,
MACHINE
COMMAND
PROGRAM DISPLAY
SEARCH
PROGERAM FILE
SEARCH
MONITOR menu display No.5 to 8
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
LOC-VAR
LOC-VAR
......
......
RESERCH
2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION
I-20
2.1 POSITION When the menu key
POSI is pressed, the POSITION screen is displayed.
POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU
[POSITION] 12/14 13:27 MONITOR 1 O12345678 N12345-12 O 1000 N 200-30 S 12345 ( 2000) #1 T 1234 M 12 #1 Fc 12000.00
G00 X-345.67 Y345.67; T1234; N100 S5000M3; N200 G00Z-100.;
X -12345.678
Y 12345.678
Z 0.000
C 0.000
(4-axis pecifications)
The following can be performed on the POSITION screen: (1) Full screen erase (2) Origin set. The current value (POSITION) data of each axis can be set to 0. (3) Manual numeric command. Miscellaneous function output of M, S, T, etc., can be set through the
screen.
2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION
I-21
Display item Explanation 12/14 13:27 The date and the time are displayed. O12345678 N12345-12 The currently executing program number, sequence number, and
block number are displayed. O 1000 N 200-30 When a subprogram is being executed, the program number,
sequence number, and block number of the subprogram are displayed.
[POSITION] X-12345.678 Y 12345.678 Z 0.000 #1 C 0.000 #1
The relative value is coordinate position using referenced to the machine zero point. The current position during execution and its abbreviation (if the position is specific or is placed in specific state) are displayed. #1~#4 (first to fourth reference point positions), ] [ (servo off state), > < (axis removed state) MR (mirror image) are displayed. Whether the tool reference position (figure below (a)) or the current position of the tool nose position (figure below (b)) that considers offset, such as tool length offset amount or tool diameter compensation amount, in the tool reference position is applied to the display of the relative value can be selected with the parameter.
Workpiece offset Machine zero point
Workpiece zero point
Relative value (a) (Machine position) Displayed by tool reference position
Workpiece coordinate
Current value B
Tool reference position Tool nose position
Relative value (b) Displayed by tool nose position
Tool
(Continued on next page)
2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION
I-22
Display item Explanation
The relative of the relation value counter display contents and the parameters is as shown below.
#1287 ext23 /bit3
#1221 aux 05/bit7
0 1
0
Relative value (figure below (a))
Relative value (figure below (b)) The compensation amount is considered according to #1287 ext23/bit4,5 contents.
1
Relative value (figure below (a))
The current value B is displayed in M60S series. In the M60A/64 lathe system, not only the counter of the POSITION screen but also the relative value of the COORDINATE screen changes to the current value B. The relative value (figure below (b)) is displayed in the M64A/64(Machining system) /65/66.
0 Relative value The compensation amount is considered according to #1287 ext23/bit4,5 contents. #1221 aux
05/bit7 1
Current value B The counter of the POSITION screen changes to the current value B.
S 12345 (2000) T 1234 M 12 Fc 12000.00
The spindle rotation speed command value is displayed. The actual spindle rotation speed is shown in ( ). The tool command value is displayed. The last four digits of the miscellaneous function command value are displayed. During interpolation feed, the speed in the current vector direction in moving is displayed. During independent axis feed, the speed of the axis with the highest speed is displayed.
G00 X-345.67 Y345.67; T1234; N100 S5000M3; N200 G00Z-100.;
Four blocks of the current program being executed are displayed. The top block is an already executed block. The subsequent three lines are the subsequent block program.
2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION
I-23
2.1.1 Total Clear of Screen If you do not use the unit for extended periods, clear the entire screen to prevent deterioration of the display
unit by the following procedures. (1) Select 1st menu
POSI on the MONITOR screen and press the
SHIFT and
C.B CAN keys to clear total
screen. (2) If you want to display screen after clearing of total screen, press a function select key such as
MONI- TOR to
display the screen you desire. 2.1.2 Position Display Counter Zero and Origin Zero Counter Zero The POSITION display only is set to zero and the absolute value data remains unchanged. Origin Zero This sets both POSITION display and absolute value data to zero. It is equivalent to G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ;. (Note1) Origin zero is valid only when #1123 origin is set to 0. (Note2) Counter zero and origin zero are disabled in the current value B.
In the following operations, the
INPUT key has the counter zero function and the
C.B CAN key
has the origin zero (set zero) function.
Press the address key X .
1) The address indication corresponding to the key is highlighted.
Press the
INPUT key (counter zero) or
C.B CAN key (origin zero).
1) The axis position data is set to zero and
the next axis name is highlighted. 2) By repeatedly pressing the
INPUT key or
C.B CAN key, the position data of other axes
can be cleared to zero. 3) Upon completion of zero clear of final
axis, the display is no longer reversed. 4) If you press an axis address key
midway, the address of specified axis is highlighted.
5) When you press a key other than axis address key, the display is no longer reversed.
X -12345.678 Y 1.234 Z 12.345 C 123.456
X -12345.678 Y 1.234 Z 12.345 C 123.456
X 0.000 Y 1.234 Z 12.345 C 123.456
X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 12.345 C 123.456
2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION
I-24
2.1.3 Manual Numeric Command (S, T, M) You can easily execute spindle function S, tool function T and miscellaneous function M by operation on the
screen. Namely, you can key in S, T and M commands as if they were commanded by a program. (1) Conditions that allow manual numeric command M, S or T command sequence is not under way. Even during automatic start or pause, for example, the
manual numeric command is available if above conditions are met. (2) Operating procedures of manual numeric commands 1) Select the position display
POSI menu screen. 2) Press the address key corresponding to the command. This causes the corresponding commanded
value display section to be highlighted and makes the system ready for input of manual numeric command. The spindle function key is
S , tool function key is
T and miscellaneous function key is
M . 3) Key-in the numerical value to be input. 4) Press the
INPUT key.
(Example) The procedures to execute S1200 by manual numeric command are given below. First select POSITION display on MONITOR screen.
On screen, last executed command value is displayed.
Press the address key
S .
1) The address corresponding to the pressed key and numerical value setting range are highlighted.
S 500
S
Set the numerical value by number keys.
1
2
0
0
1) The set numbers are displayed successively as highlighted.
S 1200
Press the
INPUT key.
1) The S command is executed. 2) The reversed display on screen
returns to normal.
S 1200
2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION
I-25
(3) Action to be taken when an erroneous numeric is set and the correct one is desired to be set There are two methods: Method (1) While pressing the
DELETE INS key, delete the set digits one by one. Then, retry to enter the
correct digits. Method (2) Retry the entry, beginning with pressing the address key corresponding to the
command.
Press
DELETE INS
DELETE INS
DELETE INS to delete the
erroneously set numeric.
(Example) In this condition, the numeric is
desired to be replaced by S1500.
S 1200
Method (1)
S 1
Enter
5
0
0 . S 1500
Press address key
S to return to the initial status.
Method (2)
S
Enter
1
5
0
0 . S 1500
(4) Setting/output range of manual numeric command The setting and output range for the manual numeric command are indicated.
BCD Signed binary M 0~9999 S 99999 T 0~9999
2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION
I-26
(Note 1) If the type is BCD output and a negative number is set, the positive value converted from it will be output.
(Example) Manual numeric command
Output
M -100 M 100 (Note 2) If the number of digits specified in the command exceeds the setting range, the most significant
digit will be lost. (Example)
M 1234
5 M 2345
Most significant digit is lost. 1
(5) Other notes on operation (1) When a minus command is set: Before setting the numeric, press the
key.
(Example) If S-150 is specified: Press address key
S . Then, press key
1
5
0 in order.
Press the
INPUT key.
S-150
S 150
1) A minus value will be output, but a positive value will display.
(2) When manual numeric command operation stops halfway: If the operation is desired to be stopped before input after pressing the address key, press any
non-numeric key. If a manual numeric command address-key such as M, S, T is pressed, the previous operation
will stop. In this case, the next manual numeric command sequentially begins. If an axis address key (X, Y, or Z, etc.) is pressed, the manual numeric command will stop. In this
case, the origin zero or counter zero mode is then entered. If the
SHIFT
C.B CAN keys are pressed, the manual numeric command will stop. In this case, the
POSITION screen is blanked. If one of the following keys is pressed, the operation will not stop: 1) Position display function key
MONI- TOR
2)
key pressed before a numeric is set (will be processed as a minus command.) 3)
DELETE INS key when a numeric has been set (The set data will be deleted.)
(3) The macro interruption codes (M96, M97) and subprogram call codes (M98, M99) will not be processed even if these codes are issued.
(4) No surface speed command is available. In the constant surface speed mode, no command is processed, if specified.
2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION
I-27
(5) The set data will be canceled if screen change is executed during manual numeric command operation.
(6) If operations in which manual numeric commands are carried out (M, S, T keys) are attempted when the manual numeric command protect function is valid, the error message "E05 NOT ACCEPTABLE" will occur.
2.1.4 Displaying Automatic Operation Program (1) Displaying the operation program during automatic operation
During memory, tape, or MDI operation, up to four blocks of the specified program are displayed. The block being executed or the completed block will display at the top line.
(2) Displaying the operation program after SEARCH The head block of the operation searched program is displayed at the line of the next command.
(3) Displaying the operation program at branch to or at return from subprogram When a branch command (M98) block is executed, the subprogram is immediately displayed. When a
return command (M99) block is executed, the main program is immediately displayed.
(4) Difference between one block of work program and one execution block
1) A block containing only EOB or only a comment statement is not interpreted as one execution block. Instead it is processed as one block together with the next block.
2) A block that does not contain a movement command or MST command, such as a variable command, is not interpreted as one execution block. Instead, the program up to the block containing a movement command or MST command is handled in the same manner as one block.
(Note) When a parameter "MACRO SINGLE" is ON, a variable command block is regarded as an execution block.
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-28
2.2 COORDINATE When the menu key
COORDI is pressed, the COORDINATE screen is displayed.
POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU
[COORDINATE] O12345678 N12345-12 MONITOR2 2.1/2 O 1000 N 200-30 Fc 0.00 WORK COUNT 1300/ 30000
N1 G00 X-345.678; [POSITION] [WORK (G54)] [MACHINE] N2 T1234; X1 100.000 X1 100.000 X1 100.000 N3 S5000 M3; Y1 200.000 Y1 200.000 Y1 200.000 N4 G00 Z-100; Z1 300.000 Z1 300.000 Z1 300.000 N5 G01 X100. F500; A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 N6 Y100.; B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 N7 G02 X200. R200.; C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 [DIS TO GO] [NEXT] 0 50 100 X1 100.000 X1 100.000 S1 5000 110% Y1 200.000 Y1 200.000 ( 2000) Z1 300.000 Z1 300.000 S2 0 0 50 100 A 0.000 A 0.000 ( 0) 80% B 0.000 B 0.000 T 1234
STP mm ABS G40 G54 MEMORY C 0.000 C 0.000 M 12
Multiple axis display screen
This screen is displayed on second page of the COORDINATE screen for 4-Spindle specification or more or 7-Servo axis specification or more.
POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU
[COORDINATE] O 120 N 0- 0 MONITOR2 2.2/2 O N - Fc 0.00 WORK COUNT 0/ 0 [POSITION] [WORK (G54)] [MACHINE] [DIS TO GO] [POSITION B] [MANUAL IT] X1 0.000#1 X1 0.000 X1 0.000 X1 0.000 X1 0.000 X1 0.000 Y1 0.000#1 Y1 0.000 Y1 0.000 Y1 0.000 Y1 0.000 Y1 0.000 Z1 0.000#1 Z1 0.000 Z1 0.000 Z1 0.000 Z1 0.000 Z1 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 U1 0.000 U1 0.000 U1 0.000 U1 0.000 U1 0.000 U1 0.000 V1 0.000 V1 0.000 V1 0.000 V1 0.000 V1 0.000 V1 0.000 N01 G28XYZ ; N02 G91 G41 D1 G17 ; N03 G00 X500. ; N04 G00 Y500. ; STP mm ABS G40 G54 MEMORY
Display item Explanation O12345678 N12345-12 The currently executing program number, sequence number, and
block number are displayed. O 1000 N 200-30 When a subprogram is being executed, the program number,
sequence number, and block number of the subprogram are displayed.
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-29
Display item Explanation
[POSITION] X -345.678 Y 345.678 Z 0.000#1 C 0.000
The current position during execution and the status abbreviation of the axis are displayed. The status symbol is the same as the display on the POSITION screen. (Note) When using the M64A/M64 lathe system, the relative value display can be changed to the current value B (value that does not include tool length offset amount, tool diameter compensation amount, workpiece coordinate offset amount) by setting parameter "#1221 aux05/bit7" and "#1287 ext23/bit3".
Workpiece offset Machine zero point
Workpiece zero point
Relative value (a) (Machine position) Displayed by tool reference position
Workpiece coordinate
Current value B
Tool reference position Tool nose position
Relative value (b) Displayed by tool nose position
Tool
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-30
Display item Explanation
[WORK (G54)] X -345.678 Y 345.678 Z 0.000 C 0.000
G54~G59, P1~P48 workpiece coordinate system modal numbers and the workpiece coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system are displayed. (Note) P1 to P48 are options.
[MACHINE] X -345.678 Y 345.678 Z 0.000 C 0.000
The coordinate of each axis in the basic machine coordinate system in which the unique position determined depending on the machine is used as the zero point are displayed.
[DIS TO GO] X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000
The remaining distance of the move command being executed (incremental distance from the current position to the end point of the block) is displayed during automatic operation start busy or pause busy.
[NEXT] X1 0.000 S1 5000 Y1 0.000 ( 2000) Z1 0.000 S2 0 A 0.000 ( 0) B 0.000 T 1234 C 0.000 M 12 (Note) On the multi-axis display screen, this display item corresponds to the area in which [POSITION B] and [MANUAL IT] are displayed.
This displays the command contents of the block executed after the block currently in execution during automatic operation. The following display items can be selected according to setting the parameters. (Note1) [MST] The spindle rotation speed command value is displayed. The actual spindle rotation speed is shown in ( ). The tool command value is displayed. The last four digits of the miscellaneous function command value are displayed. [POSITION B] Tool nose position coordinate that is considered tool length offset and tool diameter compensation can be displayed in workpiece coordinate. Tool length offset and tool diameter compensation amount that are considered depend on tool (T) designation or the currently selected tool No. that is input from the external source. [MANUAL IT] The amount moved with the manual mode while the manual absolute switch was OFF is displayed. The manual interrupt amount can be selected for the counter value displayed on the coordinate value screen using parameter.
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-31
(Note1) The type of position counter to display can be selected with the base specification parameter (#1137 Cntsel).
Counter Parameter #1137 Cntsel Left Right
00 or 10 MST 01 or 11 Next command 02 or 12 Current value B 03 or 13
Next command
Manual interrupt amount 20 MST 21 Next command 22 Current value B 23
Current value B
Manual interrupt amount 30 MST 31 Next command 32 Current value B 33
Manual interrupt amount
Manual interrupt amount
Display item Explanation N1 G00 X-345.678 Y345.678; N2 T1234; N3 S5000 M3; N4 G00 Z-100; N5 G01 X100.F500; N6 Y100.; N7 G02 X200.R200.;
The current work program being executed is displayed. This is the same as the POSITION screen display.
SPINDLE
Z-AX
The spindle load and Z axis load can be displayed as a bar graph, using the user PLC.
WORK COUNT: / Workpiece count Max. workpiece count
Workpiece count : Indicates count data of the number of workpieces.
Workpiece count Max. value :
The max. workpiece value set in #8003 WRK LIMIT value is displayed.
Display range: 0~999999
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-32
2.2.1 Correcting the Buffer
(1) Outline During automatic operation (memory or tape operation) or MDI operation, a block stop can be applied, and the next command can be corrected or changed. When a program error occurs, the block in which the error occurred can be corrected without resetting the NC, and operation can be continued. (Note) When running a machining program from the external memory, even if the buffer is
corrected, the revisions are not reflected on the original program.
Tape or IC card
Memory
MDI
Preread block
Execution block NC operation
Machine control
Buffer correction
(2) Details (a) The next command can be corrected in the following two cases.
When single block stop is applied, and there is a machining program containing a next command to be corrected.
During automatic operation, there is an error (program error) in the next command's machining program, and the program is stopped.
(b) During memory or MDI operation, not only the displayed buffer data but also the memory and
MDI contents are corrected with the buffer corrections. (c) If an error occurs in the preread block, the block in which the error occurred can be corrected.
(Note) The buffers on the second and third pages of the COORDINATE screen cannot be corrected.
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-33
(3) Operation method During a single block stop or when a program error stop occurs, the buffer can be corrected with the following operations, and operation can be continued.
(a)
(b)
* Buffer correction area (39 characters 6 lines)
The normally executed program appears in this area. (Up to six lines will be displayed.)
Commands before previous command Previous command Command in execution Next command and subsequent commands
: : N122 T1212; N123 S1230 M3; N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195. F50; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; : :
[Buffer correction area in normal state]
Display area
When correcting the buffer, the display changes so that the next command is displayed at the head of the area, and the entire buffer correction area is highlighted. The cursor will initially flicker at the head of the next command. The cursor can be moved freely within the buffer correction area using the cursor keys. (6 lines)
N123 S1230 M3; N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195. F50; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.;
Next command and subsequent commands [Buffer correction area during buffer correction]
Select the first page of the COORDINATE screen.
Press the one of the cursor keys (
,
,
,
) or tab keys (
,
).
The buffer correction mode will be entered, and the buffer correction area will be highlighted.
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-34
(c)
(d) The buffer correction mode ends, and the corrected data is written into to program. If a program error has occurred, the error display disappears.
(e)
The program execution resumes from the currently stopped position.
(Example) An example of creating and executing the following program is given below. If a program error (P62) occurs in the N125 block, the cause of the error is removed by correcting the buffer.
N121 G28 X0 Y0; N122 T1212; N123 S1230 M3; N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.;
(a)
Start automatic operation. 1) A program error (P62) will occur
after N124 is executed.
N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; P62 F-CMD. NOTHING
Correct the program with the same method as editing a normal program.
Press the
INPUT key.
Confirm that the corrected data is correct, and then restart.
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-35
(b)
Press the
key.
1) The head area of the program being executed will change to the buffer correction area when the cursor key is pressed. (The buffer correction mode will be entered.)
2) The message "BUFFER EDIT" will appear.
N125 G01 X80. Y195.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.;
BUFFER EDIT P62 F-CMD. NOTHING
(c) Insert "F50" at the end of the N125 line.
BUFFER EDIT P62 F-CMD. NOTHING
N125 G01 X80. Y195. F50.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.;
(d)
Press the
INPUT key.
1) The buffer correction will end when the INPUT key is pressed, and the program being executed will display. (The buffer correction mode will be canceled.)
2) The message "BUFFER EDIT" will disappear.
3) The program error (P62) will disappear.
N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195. F50.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.;
(e) Start automatic operation.
Execution will resume from the N125 block.
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-36
(4) Supplement (a) If there is no data for the next command during automatic operation start or automatic operation
with tape, etc., the buffer correction mode will not be entered even if the cursor key is pressed. % is always inserted at the end of the memory or the next command data will not be lost.
Buffer correction possible Buffer correction not possible (memory operation) (tape operation)
N128 G01 X110.;
N128 G01 X110.; %
(b) The key operations for making corrections during the buffer correction mode are the same as the operations for editing the program. However, blocks other than those displayed in the buffer correction area cannot be displayed and operated by feeding the page with the
NEXT PAGE or
PREVIOUS PAGE
keys or by scrolling with the cursor keys. The page feed and scrolling operations will be ignored.
Operation Buffer correction Program correction Scroll Not possible Possible Page feed/return Not possible Possible Cursor movement Possible Possible Character replacement Possible Possible Character insertion Possible Possible Character deletion Possible Possible Block deletion Possible Possible
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-37
(c) Even if the buffer is corrected, if the
INPUT key has not been pressed, the corrections can be returned to the original next command by pressing the
NEXT PAGE or
PREVIOUS PAGE key. The mode will
remain the buffer correction mode.
N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; P62 F-CMD. NOTHING
Press the
key.
N125 G01 X80. Y195.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.;
BUFFER EDIT
Insert F50. at the end of the N125 line.
N125 G01 X80. Y195.F50.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.;
BUFFER EDIT
Press the
NEXT PAGE or
PREVIOUS PAGE key.
1) Return to the state when buffer correction is started.
N125 G01 X80. Y195.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.;
BUFFER EDIT
(Note) The
NEXT PAGE and
PREVIOUS PAGE keys function to cancel the edited details during buffer correction, so
the page cannot be switched to the COORDINATE screen page 2 and following. Quit buffer correction to change the page.
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-38
(d) Buffer correction will be canceled if another screen is opened or reset is executed during the correction. The corrected details will not be reflected.
(e) Operation cannot be started during buffer correction. The "M01 Operation alarm 0013" will
occur. (f) If there is no ; (EOB) in the last block edited when
INPUT is pressed, it will be added automatically.
N125 G01 X80. Y195.F50.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.
BUFFER EDIT
Press the
INPUT key.
1) ";" is added to the end of the N130 block.
N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195. F50.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.;
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-39
(g) When the buffer correction mode is entered, there may be cases when the program up to ; (EOB) does not fit in and only part of the program is displayed because the last block displayed in the buffer correction area is long.
N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 Y200.; N130 G74 X120.0 Y100.0 Z-20.0 R-10.0 P2.,R0;
Press the
key.
1) "P2.,R0" of N130 is not displayed.
N125 G01 X80. Y195. F50.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 Y200.; N130 G74 X120.0 Y100.0 Z-20.0 R-10.0
BUFFER EDIT
(Note) Handling when entire block is not displayed The results will differ according to the state when
INPUT key was pressed.
State Results ; (EOB) is not added to the end of displayed data.
The section (P2.,R0;) not displayed will be the continuing part of the displayed section.
; (EOB) is added to the end of the displayed data.
The section (P2.,R0;) not displayed will become separate block.
The N130 block is deleted with the
C.B CAN key.
During memory/MDI operation: The section (P2.,R0;) not displayed will also be deleted.
During tape operation: Only the displayed section will be deleted, and the section not displayed will be kept as a separate block.
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-40
(h) The number of characters that can be input at once will be the total of the number of characters added (or deleted) with buffer correction and the number of characters in the other blocks displayed in the correction area. The maximum number will be 234 characters (39 characters 6 lines). When adding data, characters exceeding the correction area's margin cannot be added.
In this case, press the
INPUT key and quit the buffer correction once. Then, correct the buffer again. When buffer correction is started, a line return is added for each block and a space is added for each word, so there will be more space for adding characters.
(Example) Add "N175 G74 Z10.0 R5.0 P2.0 ;" after N170.
N120 G02 X150.0 Y100.0 I25.0 J0.0; N130 G02 X150.0 Y150.0 I0.0 J25.0; N140 G02 X200.0 Y150.0 I25.0 J0.0; N150 G02 X200.0 Y200.0 I0.0 J25.0; N160 G02 X250.0 Y200.0 I25.0 J0.0; N170 G02 X250.0 Y250.0 I0.0 J25.0; N180 G02 X300.0 Y250.0 I25.0 J0.0;
Press the
key.
N130 G02 X150.0 Y150.0 I0.0 J25.0; N140 G02 X200.0 Y150.0 I25.0 J0.0; N150 G02 X200.0 Y200.0 I0.0 J25.0; N160 G02 X250.0 Y200.0 I25.0 J0.0; N170 G02 X250.0 Y250.0 I0.0 J25.0; N180 G02 X300.0 Y250.0 I25.0 J0.0;
BUFFER EDIT
Insert "N175G74Z10.0R;".
N130 G02 X150.0 Y150.0 I0.0 J25.0; N140 G02 X200.0 Y150.0 I25.0 J0.0; N150 G02 X200.0 Y200.0 I0.0 J25.0; N160 G02 X250.0 Y200.0 I25.0 J0.0; N170 G02 X250.0 Y250.0 I0.0 J25.0;N175G 74Z-10.0R;N180G02X300.0Y250.0I25.0J0.0;
BUFFER EDIT
Press the
INPUT key.
N120 G02 X150.0 Y100.0 I25.0 J0.0; N130 G02 X150.0 Y150.0 I0.0 J25.0; N140 G02 X200.0 Y150.0 I25.0 J0.0; N150 G02 X200.0 Y200.0 I0.0 J25.0; N160 G02 X250.0 Y200.0 I25.0 J0.0; N170 G02 X250.0 Y250.0 I0.0 J25.0; N175 G74 Z-10.0 R; N180 G02 X300.0 Y250.0 I25.0 J0.0;
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-41
Press the
key.
N130 G02 X150.0 Y150.0 I0.0 J25.0; N140 G02 X200.0 Y150.0 I25.0 J0.0; N150 G02 X200.0 Y200.0 I0.0 J25.0; N160 G02 X250.0 Y200.0 I25.0 J0.0; N170 G02 X250.0 Y250.0 I0.0 J25.0; N175 G74 Z-10.0 R;
BUFFER EDIT
Insert "5.0P2.0" at the end of the N175 line.
N130 G02 X150.0 Y150.0 I0.0 J25.0; N140 G02 X200.0 Y150.0 I25.0 J0.0; N150 G02 X200.0 Y200.0 I0.0 J25.0; N160 G02 X250.0 Y200.0 I25.0 J0.0; N170 G02 X250.0 Y250.0 I0.0 J25.0; N175 G74 Z-10.0 R-5.0 P2.0;
BUFFER EDIT
Press the
INPUT key.
N120 G02 X150.0 Y100.0 I25.0 J0.0; N130 G02 X150.0 Y150.0 I0.0 J25.0; N140 G02 X200.0 Y150.0 I25.0 J0.0; N150 G02 X200.0 Y200.0 I0.0 J25.0; N160 G02 X250.0 Y200.0 I25.0 J0.0; N170 G02 X250.0 Y250.0 I0.0 J25.0; N175 G74 Z-10.0 R-5.0 P2.0; N180 G02 X300.0 Y250.0 I25.0 J0.0;
(i) If an error occurs in the preread block and the buffer correction mode is entered, the block in
which the error occurred will appear at the head of the area. (j) The error cannot be canceled for a fixed cycle or compound fixed cycle that cannot be displayed. Programs that cannot be displayed include: Fixed cycles Compound fixed cycles Machine maker macros (when base specification parameter #1166 fixpro=0)
When running program No. 9000 to 9999 while the program display lock is valid (base specification parameter #1122 pglk_c=1).
(k) When the program area selection (base specification parameter #1050 MemPrg) is set to 0
[program system same control specifications] and programs with the same numbers are run for the two systems, the buffer cannot be corrected. The message "CAN'T BUF. EDIT" will appear.
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-42
(l) The buffer cannot be corrected during IC card operation with M198. The message "CAN'T BUF. EDIT" will appear.
(m) Cases in which buffer cannot be corrected The subprogram call command (M98) and return command (M99) will execute the next block to
be executed (subprogram head and return designation) with one automatic start. Thus, the buffer for the subprogram's head and return destination blocks cannot be corrected.
(Example 1)
O10 G28 XYZ : N10 G0 X50.; M98 P100; N11 G0 X100.; N12 G0 X150.; M02; %
O100 N100 G01 Y10. F5000.; N110 G01 Z10.; M99; %
If automatic start is executed when the block is stopped with N10, the N100 block will be executed and will stop with N110. Thus, the buffer for N100 cannot be corrected. If automatic start is executed when the block is stopped with N110, the N11 block will be executed and will stop with N12. Thus, the buffer for N11 cannot be corrected. (Note that if the buffer is corrected when the block is stopped before N10, then N11 can be corrected.)
Normal buffer correction of the subprogram's head is not possible, as shown in the above example. Note that if there is a G0/G1 command in the M98 block, the block will stop at that block. (Example: G0M98P100;) If a block containing only the sequence No. is created at the head of the subprogram, the program will stop at that block, so buffer correction of the following blocks is possible. (Example 2)
O100 N1; Stops here G01Y10.F5000; M99; %
2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE
I-43
(6) Precautions (a) When an error occurs during continuous operation, if the program processes the variables, etc.,
in one step, the display will start not from the error block but instead from the head of the variables in which there was a preread error block. Six lines of the program will be displayed.
Example) X100.;
When the buffer correction mode is entered, these six lines will be displayed.
X-10000000; Example when this block has a program error (P35). If the macro block has seven or more lines, the block in which the program error occurred will
not be displayed. (b) Edit lock C When edit lock C is valid (base specification parameter #1121 edlk_c=1), buffer correction of
program numbers 9000 to 9999 is not possible. The "E16 EDIT LOCK C" error will occur. When the base specification parameter #1122 pglk_c=1/2, buffer correction of program
numbers 9000 to 9999 is not possible. The "E16 EDIT LOCK C" error will occur.
(Note) When either base specification parameter #1121 edlk_c or #1122 pglk_c is set, the power must be rebooted.
(c) Data protection key Buffer correction is possible when data protection key 1 (*KEY1: Y238) is ON. Buffer correction is possible when data protection key 2 (*KEY2: Y239) is ON. Buffer correction is not possible when data protection key 3 (*KEY3: Y23A) is ON. The message
"DATA PROTECT" will appear. (d) Edit lock B When edit lock B is valid (control parameter #8105 EDIT LOCK B = 1), buffer correction of
program numbers 8000 to 9999 is not possible. The "E15 EDIT LOCK B" error will occur.
#100=0; #101=1; #102=2; #103=3; #104=4; #105=5;
2. Monitor 2.3 COMMAND
I-44
2.3 COMMAND When the menu key
COMMAND is pressed, the COMMAND screen is displayed. This screen consists of three pages. It displays the execution program monitor, execution modal monitor,
and cumulative time data. Page switching is by pressing the
NEXT PAGE key or
PREVIOUS PAGE key.
2.3.1 Execution Program Monitor This screen displays the active machining
program's execution blocks for monitoring.
POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU
[COMMAND] MONITOR 3.1/3 O12345678 N12345-12 [WORK] O 1000 N 200-30 X 100.000 Y 200.000 Z 300.000 C 0.000 N10 ......... ; N20 ............ ; N30 ; N40 ; N50 ; N60 ; N70 ; N80 ; N90 ; N100 ;
Display item Explanation O12345678 N12345-12 The currently executing program number, sequence number, and
block number are displayed. O1000 N200-30
When a subprogram is being executed, the program number, sequence number, and block number of the subprogram are displayed.
N10 ......... ; N20 ............ ; N30 ;
N90 ; N100 ;
The current program being executed is displayed. The cursor is moved to the top of the current block being executed. When program execution reaches N90, the cursor is also moved to the top of N90. When the N100 block is executed, the N100 block is displayed starting at the top of the screen and the cursor is also moved to the top. The read data is displayed also during tape running in the above way.
[WORK] X 100.000 Y 200.000 Z 300.000 C 0.000
The workpiece coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system being currently executed are displayed.
2. Monitor 2.3 COMMAND
I-45
2.3.2 Execution Modal Monitor By switching the screen from the execution program's monitor screen (in the previous section) by using the
NEXT PAGE key, the execution modal's monitor screen is displayed. This screen mainly displays the modal
values of the active machining program for monitoring. [M system] [L system]
POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU
[MODAL INFORM.] MONITOR 3. 2/3 O12345678 N 12345-12 [WORK] O 1000 N 200-30 X1 100.000 G00 G18 G90 G94 Y1 200.000 G21 G80 G98 G15 G64 Z1 300.000 G67 G40.1 G97 G50.1 G43.1 A1 0.000 G68 :R= B1 0.000 G51 :P= G54 : C1 0.000 G40: D = G49: H = G05 : H = :P10000 FA 24000.00 S 12345 M 123454678 FM 1200.00 10 FS 0.0000 T 1234 35 B 1234 40 G28X0Y0Z0; LSK mm ABS G40 G54
POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU
[MODAL INFORM.] MONITOR 3. 2/3 O12345678 N 12345-12 [WORK] O 1000 N 200-30 X1 100.000 G00 G18 G G23 G98 Z1 200.000 G21 G40 G80 G C1 300.000 G64 G67 G69 U1 0.000 G97 G14 G13.1 G43.1 V1 0.000 W1 0.000 G54 : Tx: -12.345 Tg: 12 Tw:12 Tz: 12.345 V 0 Tc: 10.000 FA 24000.00 S 12345 M 123454678 FM 1200.00 10 FS 0.0000 T 1234 35 FE 0.0000 B 1234 40 G28X0Z0C0; LSK mm ABS G40 G54
Display item Explanation O12345678 N12345-12 The currently executing program number, sequence number, and
block number are displayed. O1000 N200-30
When a subprogram is being executed, the program number, sequence number, and block number of the subprogram are displayed.
[WORK] X1 100.000 Y1 200.000 Z1 300.000 :
The workpiece coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system being currently executed are displayed. Same as the POSITION screen.
[MODAL INFORM.] G00..........G94
G67.......G43.1
The modal state of the current G command being executed is displayed. (Note) Fixed cycle operation: When a fixed cycle command is executed, the G command in the fixed cycle control subprogram does not reflect the G modal of the calling program.
G40:D G49:H
The tool radius compensation modal and offset number and wear amount are displayed. The tool length offset modal and offset number and wear amount are displayed.
2. Monitor 2.3 COMMAND
I-46
Display item Explanation
The rotation angle for the program coordinate rotation command is displayed. The scaling magnification is displayed.
G68: R= (M system) G51: P= (M system) G05: P10000 (M system)
The high-speed machining mode and high-speed high-accuracy mode are displayed.
High-speed machining mode 3 (G05 : P3) High-speed high-accuracy control II (G05 : P10000) SSS control valid (G05 : P10000S) High-speed high-accuracy control I (G05.1 : Q1) Spline interpolation (G05.1 : Q2) Mode OFF (G05 : P0)
Tx: 12.345 (L system) Tz: 12.345 (L system) Tc: 10.000 (L system)
The total of the X axis, Z axis and additional axis' tool length and wear compensation amounts for the tool being used is displayed.
Tg: 12 (L system) Tw: 12 (L system)
The tool length offset No. is displayed. The wear compensation No. is displayed.
v (L system) FA 24000.00 FM 1200.00 FS 0.0000 FE 0.0000 (L system) S 12345 T 1234 M 12345678 10 35 40 B 1234
The constant surface speed spindle rotation speed is displayed. The program command asynchronous feedrate modal value currently being executed is displayed. (mm/min) The manual feedrate is displayed. (mm/min) The program command synchronous feedrate modal value currently being executed is displayed. (mm/rev) The thread lead command synchronous feedrate modal value currently being executed is displayed. (mm/rev) The modal value of the current program command S being executed is displayed. The modal value of the current program command T being executed is displayed. A maximum of four modal values of the current program command M being executed are displayed. The second miscellaneous function modal value of the current program command being executed is displayed.
N300 G1X-100.234~ The current program block being executed is displayed.
2. Monitor 2.3 COMMAND
I-47
2.3.3 Total Integrating Time Display By switching the screen from the execution program's monitor screen by using the
NEXT PAGE key, the TIME
screen is displayed.
POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU
[TIME] MONITOR 3.3/3 O12345678 N12345-12 O 1000 N 200-30 # 1 DATE 99/12/14 2 TIME 13:27:59 3 POWER 9999:59:59 4 AUTO OP 0: 0: 0 5 AUTO STL 0: 0: 0 6 EXT TIME1 0: 0: 0 7 EXT TIME2 0: 0: 0 #( ) DATA( ) ( ) ( )
Display item Explanation O12345678 N1234-12 The currently executing program number, sequence number, and
block number are displayed. O1000 N200-30 When a subprogram is being executed, the program number,
sequence number, and block number of the subprogram are displayed.
#1 DATE 99/12/14 2 TIME 13:27:59 3 POWER ON 9999:59:59 4 AUTO OP 0: 0: 0 5 AUTO STL 0: 0: 0 6 EXT TIME 1 0: 0: 0 7 EXT TIME 2 0: 0: 0
The date and time are set and displayed. year/month/day hour : min : sec The total integrating time in each operation state is displayed.
(1) TIME setting Set the number, hour, minute, and second corresponding to the TIME to be set.
Set 3 in # ( ). Set 0 in DATA ( ) ( ) ( )
Press the
INPUT key. #3 POWER ON 0: 0: 0
POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU
# (3) DATA ( 0 ) ( 0 ) ( 0 )
DATE : Set date (set "YEAR" in last 2 digits of Gregorian calendar) TIME : Set time in 24-hour mode. POWER ON : Total integrating time of the time from control unit power ON to OFF. AUTO OP : Total integrating time of the work time from AUTO STL button pressing in the memory
(tape) mode to M02/M30 or reset button pressing. AUTO STL : Total integrating time during automatic starting from AUTO STL button pressing in the
memory (tape) mode or MDI to feed hold stop, block stop, or reset button pressing. EXT TIME 1 : Dependent on PLC sequence. EXT TIME 2 : Dependent on PLC sequence. (Note) Integration time (#3 POWER ON to #7 EXT TIME 2): When display reaches the maximum
value (9999:59:59), integration is stopped and the maximum value remains displayed.
2. Monitor 2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH
I-48
2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH When the menu key
SEARCH is pressed, the PROGRAM SEARCH screen is displayed. The SEARCH screen enables you to call the program number, sequence number, and block number for
automatic operation from the machining programs registered in memory (or on paper type).
POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU
[PROGRAM SEARCH] MONITOR 4. 1/4 O 12345678 N 12345-12
O 1000 N 200-30 [PROGRAM FILE]
100 1500 50000 1234567 200 2000 70000 2000000 300 3000 123456 3000000 400 7000 200000 4000000 1234 10000 300000 5000000
[COLLATION BLOCK] O N - O( ) N( )-( ) COL.( ) TAPE(0)
$1
Display item Explanation O12345678 N12345-12 The currently executing program number, sequence number, and
block number are displayed. O 1000 N 200-30
When a subprogram is being executed, the program number, sequence number, and block number of the subprogram are displayed.
[PROGRAM FILE] 100 1500 50000 1234567 200 2000 70000 2000000 300 3000 123456 3000000 400 7000 200000 4000000
1234 10000 300000 5000000
The numbers of the machining programs registered in memory are listed. The numbers ranging from 1 to 99999999 are displayed in the ascending order. If the number of the registered programs exceeds one page of display, PROGRAM FILE is displayed extending across pages.
[COLLATION BLOCK] O N -
The program position for compare stop is displayed.
After MDI operation is executed, programs cannot be searched for unless reset is executed. To restart from the middle of the program, search for the restart block, and then carry out MDI operation to restore the modal state.
(Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the system name of the currently selected system is displayed as
$1 (system 1) and $2 (system 2). This is not displayed when using a 1-part system. (Only L system)
(Note 2) When using the 2-part system, the details displayed in the list of machining program numbers can be switched with the parameters.
#1050 MemPrg Details
0, 2, 4, 6 The numbers of the machining programs registered in the memory common for the systems are listed.
1, 3, 5, 7 The numbers of the machining programs registered in the memory for the selected system are listed.
2. Monitor 2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH
I-49
2.4.1 Memory Search Any work program is called from the machining programs registered in memory before work. Set the program number to be called, the sequence number, and block number. Set the tape search setting
area to 0. The initial state when power is turned ON is memory search.
Press the
INPUT key.
O ( 1234) N ( 20) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE(0)
SEARCH EXECUTION
O ( 1234) N ( 20) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE(0)
[PROGURAM SEARCH] MONITOR 4. 1/4 O1234 N 20-0 O 0 N 0-0 [PROGRAM FILE] 100 200 300 400 1234 [COLLATION BLOCK] O N - SEARCH COMPLETE O( ) N( )-( ) COL. ( ) TAPE(0)
1) A search is started. 2) When the specified program
number, sequence number, and block number are found, SEARCH COMPLETE message is displayed.
The found numbers are displayed in O and N. Data in the found block is displayed in the work program display area.
Set the program number to be called. Set the sequence number and block number as required. (Example) To call O1234 N20 block, O ( 1 2 3 4 ) N ( 2 0 ) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE (0)
(Note 1) If one of the following operations is executed in the EDIT screen after memory search, the system
enters a status in which nothing is being searched. Operation is disabled at this time. In this case, execute the search again.
Deleting the program being searched. Deleting the sequence number for which the search was being executed. Deleting the block corresponding to the block number for which the search was being executed. (Note 2) One block which the control unit executes in one automatic start cycle can be searched in this
case. The block with ; (EOB) or sequence number only is not regarded as a one cycle execution block. Axis movement command or control command such as M, S, or T is contained in it.
2. Monitor 2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH
I-50
(Note 3) When using the 2-part system, the method for calling the program No., sequence No. and block No. for automatic operation can be switched with the parameters.
#1050 MemPrg
#1285 ext21/bit1 Details
0, 2, 4, 6 - Selected system: The machining program registered in the memory common for the systems is called with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.
System that is not selected: The called machining program is held. 1, 3, 5, 7 OFF Selected system: The machining program registered in the memory for the
selected system is called with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.
System that is not selected: The called machining program is held. ON Selected system: The machining program registered in the memory for the
selected system is called with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.
System that is not selected: The machining program registered in the memory for each system is called with the designated program No.
(Note 4) When using the 2-part system and the same number batch search for all system programs is
valid, the presence of machining programs for each system is searched for in the memory in the following manner.
Presence of program System 1 System 2
Operation
Yes Yes Memory search is carried out simultaneously for the System 1 and System 2 machining programs.
Yes No Memory search is carried out for the System 1 machining program, and then an error (E14) occurs.
No Yes Memory search is carried out for the System 2 machining program, and then an error (E14) occurs.
No No An error (E14) occurs.
2. Monitor 2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH
I-51
2.4.2 Tape Search If processing is desired to be executed from a halfway position on paper tape when running the machining
program using paper tape, the tape can be searched for the sequence number and other information. Before using the tape reader, match tape reader setting and control unit input/output parameter setting. Set
the input/output basic parameters and input/output device parameters on the DATA IN/OUT screen. Mount the paper tape on the tape reader. Then, select tape operation mode and execute the following
search: (1) Set the target program number in O ( ). Set the target sequence number in N ( ). Set the target block
number in - ( ). Set "1" in TAPE ( ). (2) Press the
INPUT key.
(Example)
O ( 1 0 ) N ( 1 ) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE( 1 )
O ( 10) N ( 1) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE( 1)
SEARCH EXECUTION
O ( 10) N ( 1) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE( 1)
[PROGURAM SEARCH] MONITOR 4. 1/4 O 10 N 1-0 O 0 N 0-0 [PROGRAM FILE] 100 200 300 400 1234 [COLLATION BLOCK] O N - SEARCH COMPLETE O( ) N( )-( ) COL. ( ) TAPE(1)
1) A search is started. The paper tape reader operates and paper tape is run.
2) During search, the machining program data being read is displayed at the top of the setting area. Message SEARCH EXECUTION is displayed during this period.
3) When the specified program is found, the search completion message is displayed.
The target numbers are displayed at O and N, located at the top of the screen. The data of the target block is displayed in the machining program's display area.
Press the
INPUT key.
(Note 1) If the tape contains a $ mark during tape operation, a program error (P32) will occur at the $ mark.
2. Monitor 2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH
I-52
(Supplements) (1) Search starts in the position set in the tape reader. (In the label skip status, control jumps to the first
EOB.) (2) After the search is completed, the searched block is read and the tape reader stops. (3) If the NC is reset during search, the search stops. If the NC is reset after search is completed, the
unsearched status returns. (4) If the specified block has not been found after the data to the EOR is read, the following message is
displayed: "E03 NB NOT FOUND" If control parameter "% RWD (SEARCH)" is OFF, the tape will stop at the EOR of the program end.
If the parameter is ON, the tape will be rewound to the EOR of the program head and will stop there. (Note) Even if control parameter "% RWD (SEARCH)" is ON, the tape will not be rewound if I/O
DEVICE PARAM "REWIND CODE" has not been set correctly. The rewind code depends on the I/O device used. Refer to the I/O device manual for rewind
code details. (Example) When the tape was searched for N1 from a halfway position, the tape end was reached before N1 was found. (When "% RWD (SEARCH)" is ON)
% ; N1G ; N2 ; N3 ; %
Position after rewind Search start position
Tape rewind
By pressing the
INPUT key after rewind, the tape is searched for N1.
Error "E03 NB NOT FOUND"
(5) If the target program number is not specified, the tape will be searched for only N and B. This does
not relate to the program numbers in the tape. (6) If the
INPUT key is pressed after normal tape search is completed and other information including another NB is set, search will be executed. If a block stop status is entered after search is completed and the automatic running status is entered by pressing the automatic start button once, tape search will not be executed.
(7) After tape search is completed, "1" is retained in the setting field of TAPE ( ). Thus, the value does not need to be set for each tape search. Only when memory search is desired to be executed, set "0" in the setting field of TAPE ( ).
(8) The "LSK" display is cleared when the first EOB is read. It is displayed at reset or EOR read time.
2. Monitor 2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH
I-53
2.4.3 Compare Stop
The single block stop state can be applied at a random block without turning the "SINGLE BLOCK" switch ON. By using compare stop, the shape machined up to the designated block can be easily compared and machining can be resumed. (1) Setting compare stop
O ( 1234) N ( 20) - ( 3 ) COL. ( 1) TAPE( )
Designate the program No., sequence No. and program No., and set 1 in COL. ( ). (Example) To compare stop at 01234N20-3
O ( 1 2 3 4 ) N ( 2 0 ) - ( 3 ) COL. ( 1 ) TAPE ( )
Press the
INPUT key.
The program No. ("MDI" for MDI), sequence No., block No., and the message "COLL. EXEC" will appear at [COLLATION BLOCK]. The setting areas will change to blanks.
To execute compare stop with an MDI program, set 0 (zero) for the program No.
O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE ( )
[COLLATION BLOCK] COLL. EXEC
O 1234 N 20 - 3
Press the "CYCLE START" switch.
O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE ( )
[COLLATION BLOCK]
O N -
1) Operation will start. 2) When the designated block is
reached, the signal block stop state will be applied after executing that block.
3) When the single block stop mode is established by compare stop, the program number, sequence number and block number appearing in [COLLATE BLOCK] as well as the "COLL. EXEC" message are cleared.
2. Monitor 2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH
I-54
(2) Canceling compare stop
Press the
INPUT key.
The program number, sequence number and block number settings as well as the "COLL. EXEC" message are cleared.
Set 0 in COL. ( ). O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) COL. ( 0 ) TAPE ( )
O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) COL. ( 0) TAPE ( )
[COLLATION BLOCK] COLL. EXEC
O 1234 N 20 - 3
O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) COL. ( 0) TAPE ( )
[COLLATION BLOCK]
O N -
(3) Precautions
1) When there are several identical sequence numbers and block numbers in a program, compare stop results after the first corresponding block in the sequence of execution has been executed.
2) The compare stop setting is canceled in the following cases. When compare stop has been performed When "0" has been set in the "COL. ( )" on the SEARCH screen When the reset mode has been established 3) If only the program number is set, compare stop will take place at the head of the program only
when there is a program number at the first line. 4) When the program and sequence numbers have been set and the block number has not been set,
the block number is considered to be "0". 5) Compare stop cannot be performed for blocks being executed or blocks already read into the
preread buffer. (Compare stop can be set.) 6) Compare stop cannot be canceled if the block in which compare stop is set is being executed or
has already been read into the preread buffer. (Cancellation of compare stop can be set.) 7) Even if a block not included in the execution program is assigned, no check is conducted to verify
whether it exists in the program. 8) Compare stop is not performed in the tapping mode. 9) Compare stop is possible in a subprogram, but is not possible in a machine maker macro program. 10) If compare stop is set for a fixed cycle block, compare stop will be executed after the positioning
block is completed. 11) Compare stop is possible while the program display is locked (compare stop in an address 9000
program). 12) If compare stop is set for M98 program call, compare stop will be executed at the M98 block. 13) When using the 2-part system, the methods for searching the compare stop block can be switched
with the parameters. #1050 MemPrg Details
0, 2, 4, 6 The compare stop block in the machining program registered in the memory common for the systems is searched with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.
1, 3, 5, 7 The compare stop block in the machining program registered in the memory for the selected system is searched with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.
2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program
I-55
2.5 Resuming the Program
The PROGRAM RESTART screen will open when the menu key
RESEARCH is pressed.
RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU
[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 31000 N 1- 2
O N - [RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X -130.000 X -130.000 Y -10.000 Y -10.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000
N6 Y-70.; N7 X-20.; M: MODE <0>MEMORY <1>TAPE T: TYPE <0>UNMODLE <1>TYPE 1 <2>TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP
O( ) N( )-( )P( ) T( ) M( )
$1
[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 31000 N 1- 2
O N - T-SELECT T 10
S-SPEED S1 3000 2500 2000 S-SPEED S2 2000 3000 3500 2nd AUX B AUX M 6 3 8
9 6
RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU The program restart function is used to resume machining after the machining program has been stopped midway. The program and block to be restarted are searched for, and machining is resumed from that block.
The restart types include type 1, type 2 and type 3 (T command restart).
Restart method Details Restart type 1 After machining is reset due to a tool breakage, etc., machining is restarted
from the designated sequence number and block number. Restart type 2 After machining program is stopped due to a halt and the power is turned
OFF and ON, machining is restarted from the designated sequence number and block number.
Restart type 3 (T command restart)
After the machining program is stopped due to tool breakage, etc., the T command block executed last in the halted program is searched for and machining is restarted from the next block.
(Note) Restart type 3 is valid only with the lathe system.
Restart type 1 and restart type 2 include types A and B.
Restart method Type Details Type A The search is executed only in the machining program number
having the designated sequence number and block number. The machining program number cannot be omitted.
Restart type 1/2
Type B The restart search is executed for the currently searched machining program, so the machining program to be restart searched cannot be input. The designated sequence number and block number are searched from all programs within the currently searched program number. (Sequence number and block number in the subprogram are searched when there are subprograms.)
2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program
I-56
Display item Details
O 31000 N 1- 2 O N -
This displays the restart searched position (program No., sequence No., block No.). If a subprogram is searched, those numbers also display.
[RESTART- (G54)] X -130.000 Y -10.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000
This displays the remaining distance when the restart search is completed.
[RESTART-R] X -130.000 Y -10.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000
This displays the position on the local coordinate system when the restart search is completed.
N6 Y-70.; N7 X-20.;
This displays two blocks of the restart searched program.
O( ) N( ) -( )
These set the program number, sequence number and block number to be searched. For type A, the program No. cannot be omitted. For type B, the program No. cannot be input.
P( )
0 to 9999 This sets the number of times the search block appears. When, for instance, a block in the subprogram is to be searched, the search block will be executed a multiple number of times when that subprogram is called for a similar number of times, and so the number of times the block is to be executed is set here. There is no need to set this when a one-time execution is to be searched or when the search block is to be executed only once. If 0 is set, a one-time execution is searched.
0 This designates an unmodal search. 1 This designates a type 1 restart search. 2 This designates a type 2 restart search.
T( )
3 This designates a type 3 restart search. (This designates T command restart.)
0 This designates memory search. M( ) 1 This designates tape search.
T-SELECT T S-SPEED S1 S-SPEED S2 2nd AUX B AUX M
This displays the tool command value. This displays the 1st spindle rotation speed command value. This displays the 2nd spindle rotation speed command value. This displays the last four digits of the 2nd miscellaneous function command value. This displays the last four digits of the miscellaneous function command.
2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program
I-57
(Note 1) Restart type 3 is valid only with the lathe system. (Note 2) When using the 2-part system, the system name of the currently selected system is displayed as
$1 (system 1) and $2 (system 2). This is not displayed when using a 1-part system. (Only L system)
(Note 3) When using the 2-part system, the methods for searching for the program and block to be restarted can be switched with the parameters.
#1050 MemPrg
#1285 ext21/bit0 Details
0, 2, 4, 6 - The machining program block registered in the memory common for systems is searched.
1, 3, 5, 7 OFF The machining program block registered in the memory for the selected system is searched.
ON The machining program block registered in the memory for the selected system is searched. If the subprogram for the selected system is empty, the corresponding block is searched from the program with the same number saved in the $1 memory. (Only type B)
2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program
I-58
2.5.1 Operation Sequences for Program Restart
There are two restart methods, type 1 and type 2. (1) Restart type 1
When feed hold and resetting due to a broken tool, etc.
Start
Press the feed hold button and retreat to the tool change position by manual means of MDI. Press the reset key and suspend the present processing.
Replace with a new tool.
With tape operation, f ind the start of the tape.
Search the block from which machining is to restart using the type 1 method. (Refer to 2.5.2 Restart Search Operations)
Set the program restart switch (PLC signal) to ON.
Move the axes to the restart return positions. (Refer to 2.5.3 Restart Position Return System) Issue the M, S, T or B manual numerical command. (Refer to 2.5.4 Manual Numerical Commands with Program Restart)
Set the program restart switch to OFF.
Return to the automatic mode.
Press the automatic start button (cycle start button).
End
Machining program Feed hold, resetting
Operation and machining restart on PROGRAM RESTART screen
When the tool offset amount (tool length, cutter) differs, change it on the tool offset screen.
O p e r a t i o n s o n P R O G R A M R E S T A R T s c r e e n
Upon completion of the restart search, the M, S, T or B function, restart distance to go and restart position are displayed.
"RP" is displayed when the axes have finished moving to the restart position and the subsequent axes do not move in either the "+" or "-" direction.
An operation error results even if there is one axis which is not at the restart position for automatic start (cycle start). Note that if program restart automatic return (#1302 AutoRp) is turned ON, the restart position will be returned to in the order designated in the restart position return order (#2082 a_rstax) when the cycle is started. Machining will restart after the axes have returned.
For type A, the program No. cannot be omitted. For type B, the program No. cannot be input.
2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program
I-59
(2) Restart type 2 When a machining program, which differs from the machining program to be restarted, has been operated in the memory or tape mode prior to the restart search of the machining program to be restarted, and when the coordinate systems applying during the previous automatic operation and the systems applying during machining restart are to be changed. The operating sequence for type 2 is the same as that for type 1 although before the restart search all the settings of the coordinate systems must be made before the machining program is operated. The main program to be restarted must be searched for just before executing restart start.
Start
Set by MDI the coordinate systems applying when the restart program is to start.
Move the axes to their program restart posit ions.
With tape operation, find the start of the tape.
Search the block from which machining is to restart using the type 2 method. (Refer to 2.5.2 Restart Search Operations)
Set the program restart switch (PLC signal) ON.
Move the axes to the restart return positions. (Refer to 2.5.3 Restart Position Return System) Issue the M, S, T or B manual numerical command. (Refer to 2.5.4 Manual Numerical Commands with Program Restart)
Set the program restart switch to OFF.
Return to the automatic mode.
Press the cycle start button.
End
Ma c h in i ng program
Machining suspended
Machining restart
It will not be possible to restart machining properly when the axxes are not located at the positions applying to program start in cases where the program head command is an incremental command or a G92 command.
Operations on PROGRAM RESTART screen
Upon completion of the restart search, the M, S, T and B functions, the restart distance to go and the restart positions will be displayed. "RP" is displayed when the axes have finished moving to the restart position and the subsequent axes, do not move in either the "+" or "-" direction.
Operation of dif ferent program
Turn ON the power and return all the axes to their reference points.
Search the head of the program.
For type A, the program No. cannot be omitted. For type B, the program No. cannot be input.
2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program
I-60
(3) Restart type 3 (T command restart) To restart machining after stopping the machining program due to a tool breakage, etc., search for the T command block executed last in the stopped program.
Start
Press the feed hold button and retreat to the tool change position by manual means of MDI. Press the reset key and suspend the present processing.
Replace with a new tool.
With tape operation, f ind the start of the tape.
Search the block from which machining is to restart using the type 3 method. (Refer to 2.5.2 Restart Search Operations)
Set the program restart switch (PLC signal) to ON.
Move the axes to the restart return positions. (Refer to 2.5.3 Restart Position Return System) Issue the M, S, T or B manual numerical command. (Refer to 2.5.4 Manual Numerical Commands with Program Restart)
Set the program restart switch to OFF.
Return to the automatic mode.
Press the automatic start button (cycle start button).
End
Machining program Feed hold, resetting
Operation and machining restart on PROGRAM RESTART screen
When the tool offset amount (tool length, cutter) differs, change it on the tool offset screen.
O p e r a t i o n s o n P R O G R A M R E S T A R T s c r e e n
Upon completion of the restart search, the M, S, T or B function, restart distance to go and restart position are displayed.
"RP" is displayed when the axes have finished moving to the restart position and the subsequent axes do not move in either the "+" or "-" direction.
An operation error results even if there is one axis which is not at the restart position for automatic start (cycle start). Note that if program restart automatic return (#1302 AutoRp) is turned ON, all axes will simultaneously return to the restart position when the cycle is started. Machining will restart after all axes have returned.
(Note) Restart type 3 is valid only with the lathe system.
2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program
I-61
2.5.2 Restart Search Operations
(1) Type 1 restart search
a) Type A (Standard specifications)
Press the
INPUT key.
M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP
O ( 1000) N ( 6) - ( 0) P ( 1) T(1) M(0)
M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP RESEARCH EXECUTION
O ( 1000) N ( 6) - ( 0) P ( 1) T(1) M(0)
[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 1000 N 5- 0
O N - [RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X -130.000 X -150.000 Y -10.000 Y -150.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000
N6 Y-70.; N7 X-20.; M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP RESEARCH COMPLETE
O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( 1) T( ) M( )
The "RESEARCH EXECUTION" message appears during the search and upon its completion the "RESEARCH COMPLETE" message is displayed.
Assign the block at which machining is to restart and proceed with the type 1 search. (Example) To restart from the 01000 N6 block
O ( 1 0 0 0 ) N ( 6 ) - ( 0) P ( 1 ) T ( 1 ) M ( 0 )
2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program
I-62
b) Type B
Press the
INPUT key.
M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP
O ( ) N ( 6) - ( 0) P ( 1) T(1) M(0)
M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP RESEARCH EXECUTION
O ( ) N ( 6) - ( 0) P ( 1) T(1) M(0)
[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 1000 N 5- 0
O N - [RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X -130.000 X -150.000 Y -10.000 Y -150.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000
N6 Y-70.; N7 X-20.; M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP RESEARCH COMPLETE
O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T( ) M( )
The "RESEARCH EXECUTION" message appears during the search and upon its completion the "RESEARCH COMPLETE" message is displayed.
Assign the block at which machining is to restart and proceed with the type 1 search. (Example) To restart from the 01000 N6 block
O ( ) N ( 6 ) - ( 0) P ( 1 ) T ( 1 ) M ( 0 )
2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program
I-63
(2) Type 2 restart search The program and block to be restarted are searched for with type 2.
(Example) To restart from block (a) in the following program.
(Program example) O2000; ........................................................................................ Main program N1 G91 G28 X0 Y0; N2 G90 G54 G00 X0 Y0 M98 P3000; N3 G55 G00 X0 Y0 M98 P3000; ............................................... (a) N4 M02; % O3000; ........................................................................................ Subprogram N1 G42 G01 X-10. Y-10. D05 F1000; N2 X-40.; N3 Y-40.; N4 X-10.; N5 Y-10.; N6 G40 X0 Y0; N7 M99; %
a) Type A (Standard specifications)
Press the
INPUT key.
M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP
O ( 2000) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T(0) M(0)
M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP SEARCH EXECUTION
O ( 2000) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T(0) M(0)
[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 2000 N 0 - 0
O N - [RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X X Y Y Z Z C C
O2000; N1 G91 G28X0 Y0; M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP SEARCH COMPLETE
O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T( ) M( )
The "SEARCH EXECUTION" message appears during the search and upon its completion the "SEARCH COMPLETE" message is displayed.
Conduct a unmodal search to locate the head of the machining porgram.
O ( 2 0 0 0 ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T ( 0 ) M ( 0 )
2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program
I-64
Press the
INPUT key.
M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP
O ( 3000) N ( 0) - ( 0) P ( 2) T(2) M(0)
M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP RESEARCH EXECUTION
O ( 3000) N ( 0) - ( 0) P ( 2) T(2) M(0)
[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 2000 N 0 - 0
O 3000 N 0 - 0 [RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X -80.000 X -80.000 Y -40.000 Y -40.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000
O3000; N1 G42 G01 X-10. Y-10. D05 F100; M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP RESEARCH COMPLETE
O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T( ) M( )
The "RESEARCH EXECUTION" message appears during the search and upon its completion the "RESEARCH COMPLETE" message is displayed.
Assign the block at which machining is to restart and proceed with the type 2 search.
O ( 3 0 0 0 ) N ( 0 ) - ( 0 ) P ( 2 ) T ( 2 ) M ( 0 )
2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program
I-65
b) Type B The main program to be restarted is searched for.
Press the
INPUT key.
M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP
O ( ) N ( 0) - ( 0) P ( 3) T(2) M(0)
M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP RESEARCH EXECUTION
O ( ) N ( 0) - ( 0) P ( ) T(2) M(0)
[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 2000 N 0 - 0
O 3000 N 0 - 0 [RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X -80.000 X -80.000 Y -40.000 Y -40.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000
O3000; N1 G42 G01 X-10. Y-10. D05 F100; M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP RESEARCH COMPLETE
O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T( ) M( )
The "RESEARCH EXECUTION" message appears during the search and upon its completion the "RESEARCH COMPLETE" message is displayed.
Assign the block at which machining is to restart and proceed with the type 2 search.
O ( ) N ( 0 ) - ( 0 ) P ( 3 ) T ( 2 ) M ( 0 )
2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program
I-66
(3) Type 3 (T command restart) restart search
Press the
INPUT key.
1) The block containing the T command executed last will be searched for.
2) The "RESEARCH EXECUTION" message appears during the search and upon its completion the "RESEARCH COMPLETE" message is displayed.
3) If each axis is at a () position from the value set in the restart limit (#2072 rslimt), the error "E98 CAN'T RESEARCH" will occur. Manually return the axis to a position where the error will not occur, and then search.
Set "3" in TYPE T ( ) in the setting area.
O ( ) N ( ) - ( )
P ( ) T ( 3 ) M ( )
1) The data set in the setting areas other than T ( ) and M ( ) will be ignored.
2) Designate "1" in M ( ) when using the tape mode.
M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP
O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T(3) M(0)
M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP RESEARCH EXECUTION
O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T(3) M(0)
[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 1000 N 5 - 0
O N - [RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X -130.000 X -150.000 Y -10.000 Y -150.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000
N51 Y-70.; N52 X-20.; M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2
<3>T-TYP RESEARCH COMPLETE
O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T( ) M( )
(Note) Restart type 3 is valid only with the lathe system.
2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program
I-67
2.5.3 Restart Position Return System
Selection can be made by parameter setting as to whether the restart position return after the restart search is to be performed either manually or automatically.
(1) Manual restart position return Set the program restart switch to ON and mode the axes manually to the restart position.
[RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X -130.000 RP X 0.000 Y -10.000 RP Y 0.000 Z 0.000 RP Z 0.000 C 0.000 RP C 0.000
Set the restart switch to ON. Set operation to the manual
(JOG/rapid traverse) mode. Move the axes in the restart return
direction.
Set the restart switch to OFF.
After the axes have finished returning to the restart position, the [RESTART-R] values on the program restart screen are set to zero and "RP" appears by the side of the [RESTART-P] values.
(Note 1) When the restart switch is ON, the axes cannot be moved in the reverse direction to the
restart direction. An operation error (0003) will occur if the axis is moved in the opposite direction. When a tool bumps into the workpiece and must be retracted, set the restart switch to OFF and retract the tool manually.
(Note 2) After returning to the restart position, the axes cannot be moved with the restart switch ON. An operation error (0111) will occur if the axis is moved.
(Note 3) If, during cycle start, there is even one axis which has not returned to the restart position, an operation error (0112) (there is an axis which has not returned to the restart position) will result. However, and operation error will not result with an axis which has been returned to the restart position but which is no longer at that position.
(Note 4) If the restart position return axis is a machine lock axis, an operation error (0126) will occur. Release the machine lock before starting the return to the restart position.
(2) Automatic restart position return
If the program restart automatic return (#1302 AutoRP) is set to 1 and the cycle is started, the axes will return to the restart position with dry run in the order designated with the restart position return order (#2082 a_rstax). Machining will restart after the axes have returned. (Note 1) Proceed with cycle start after the axes have been moved by manual means to positions
where the tools do not make contact with the workpieces. If the axis has been moved with MDI, restart search will be invalidated. (Note 2) Even if the "#1302 AutoRP" is set to 1, the axes can be returned manually to the restart
position by turning the restart switch ON. In this case, move the axes in the order of manual restart position return automatic restart
position return. The restart operation is completed when the automatic restart position return is completed.
Thus, after completing automatic restart position return, if the operation is stopped temporarily and the restart switch is turned ON, an operation error will occur.
(Note 3) When any axis, which has already been returned manually to the restart position, is subsequently moved from the restart position, it will not return to that position even with the automatic restart position return.
(Note 4) The axis for which "#2082 a_rstax" is set to 0 will not return to the restart position. Note that if "#2082 a_rstax" is set to 0 for all axes, all axes will simultaneously return to the restart position. If the axis for which "#2082 a_rstax" is set to 0 has not completed manual restart position return when automatic restart position return is started, the error "T01 CAN'T CYCLE ST 112" (restart position return incomplete) will occur.
2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program
I-68
2.5.4 Manual Numeric Commands with Program Restart
If restart search is completed, the M, S, T and B codes used for machining will appear on the second page of the PROGRAM RESTART screen. The M, S, T and B functions can be set in the time between the completion of the restart search and the resetting or start. The maximum numbers of the codes that can be displayed are 35 for the M functions, 3 for the S functions, 3 for the T functions and 3 for the B functions. If these numbers of codes used for the machining are exceeded, the codes used first are not displayed. The codes that are not displayed cannot be commanded on this screen, and so manual numeric commands are executed on the POSITION screen. The 2nd miscellaneous function code can be changed by setting the parameters. Even if the miscellaneous function M is designated in the same block, these will appear in the commanded order.
Press the
INPUT key.
T-SELECT T 10
S-SPEED S1 3000 S-SPEED S2 2nd AUX B AUX M 6 3 8
9 6
T-SELECT T 10 S-SPEED S1 3000 S-SPEED S2 2nd AUX B AUX M 6 3 8
9 6
1) The command value with the cursor and the command name display now change to a highlighted display.
2) The highlighting remains and the cursor does not appear during the time until the command has been executed.
3) Upon completion of the command execution, the normal display is resumed and the cursor appears at the next command value position.
4) The assigned codes are displayed on the POSITION screen.
Select page 2 of the PROGRAM RESTART screen.
1) The M, S, T and B commands used for machining appear.
2) The cursor blinks at the right end of the data at the top left of the screen.
Using the
keys, move the cursor to the position of the data to be set.
T-SELECT T 10 S-SPEED S1 3000 S-SPEED S2 2nd AUX B AUX M 6 3 8
9 6
2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program
I-69
2.5.5 Checkpoints for Program Restart (1) Set the tool offset amounts and parameters before proceeding with the program restart search. If the
conditions for such are not set beforehand, it will not be possible for the axes to return to the proper machining start position.
(2) Do not conduct automatic operations during program restart. It will not be possible for the axes to return to the proper machining start position if either operation is conducted during program restart. ("During program restart" means the period from the program restart search to the start of the searched program.)
(3) It will not be possible for the axes to return to the proper machining start position if a program using user macro external signal input, machine coordinate readout or external mirror image commands is the object of the restart search.
(4) When an attempt is made to shift the coordinate systems by manual or MDI interrupt while the previous machining program is being executed, it will not be possible for the axes to return to the proper machining start position.
(5) If type 1 is used, there is no need to implement the unmodal search for the head of the program. The operation start block of the previously operated program is stored inside and the type 1 restart search commences the search (modal search) from the previous operation start block and it locates the designated block. Consequently, unmodal searches are invalid even if they are conducted.
(6) When type 2 is used with type A (standard specifications), the message "E80 TOP SEARCH ERR" will appear if an unmodal search is not executed and search is directly attempted with type 2. Conduct the unmodal search first.
(7) If either type 1 or type 2 is used, it is not possible to search blocks with macro statements during the restart search operation. (This will result in the "E13 NB NOT FOUND" error.)
To initiate a restart search for blocks with macro statements, first set the "#2 MACRO SINGLE" control parameter ON and then proceed. However, the tool path may change because of the relationship of the radius compensation, corner rounding/chamfering and geometric read ahead blocks.
(8) When conducting restart with a tape operation, it will not be possible to return to the proper machining start position if operation is started midway through the tape.
(9) WHILE/GOTO statements cannot be used during tape operations. This means that if such statements exist even when restart search is performed by tape, a program error (P29) results.
(10) The program number cannot be omitted when conducting a search with type 1 or 2 for type A (standard specification). If this number setting is omitted, the "E01 SETTING ERROR" message appears and restart search is not executed.
Reset the program number and proceed again with operation. (11) If a type 2 search is executed when using type B, the designated sequence No. and block No. will be
searched for in all programs within the designated program numbers. Note that if the same sequence No. is found in the main program and subprograms, the No. of appearances designation P will be the number of times for the entire program.
(12) Select type A and type B with the setup parameter "#1278 ext14/bit0". 0: Type A 1: Type B (13) When using multiple systems, carry out restart search for each system. (14) If the axis returning to the restart position is a linear type rotary axis, the axis will return to the workpiece
coordinate position. (15) When using type 3 (T command restart), the N number must be issued before the first T command
block in the program to be searched. (16) When using type 3 (T command restart), there must be one or more N number within 100 blocks of the
program. (17) When using type 3 (T command restart), the only T commands that can be searched are the main
program and the subprogram (nesting 1) called from the main program. (18) When using type 3 (T command restart), if the program is edited before restart search and the position
of the T command block executed last differs from the execution, the error "E98 CAN'T RESEARCH" will occur when the search is started.
2. Monitor 2.6 PLC SWITCH
I-70
2.6 PLC SWITCH When the menu key
PLC-SW is pressed, the PLC SWITCH screen is displayed. The control signals for operation are assigned by using user PLC. The PLC-SWITCH screen enables you to
set each control signal to ON or OFF. (A maximum of 32 signals)
This screen is created with the user PLCs, so each screen will differ. Refer to the instruction manual issued by the machine maker.
RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU
[PLC SWITCH] PARAM 6. 1/2 # 1 AUTO RESTART 9 2 BLOCK DELETE 10 AUTO POWER OFF 3 MANUAL ABS 11 4 OPTIONAL STOP 12 5 HANDLE IT 13 6 PROGRAM RESTART 14 7 15 8 16 #( )
2.6.1 PLC Switch ON and OFF Operation Set the number of the switch to be set to ON in # ( ) and press the
INPUT key. The mark of the switch is set to the up position.
In this state, the switch function becomes effective and is controlled.
To set OPTIONAL STOP to ON. Set 4 in # ( ). Press the
INPUT key.
RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU
[PLC SWITCH] PARAM 6. 1/2 # 1 AUTO RESTART 9 2 BLOCK DELETE 10 AUTO POWER OFF 3 MANUAL ABS 11 4 OPTIONAL STOP 12 5 HANDLE IT 13 6 PROGRAM RESTART 14 7 15 8 16 #( )
The switch mark of OPTIONAL STOP is set to the up position, indicating the switch ON state.
To set the up-position switch (ON state) to OFF (down-position switch), set the number of the ON-
state switch in # ( ) and press the
INPUT key. The PLC switch names (message display) and the function to reverse selected message display are
prepared by using user PLC. These vary depending on the machine maker.
2. Monitor 2.7 COMMON VARIABLE
I-71
2.7 COMMON VARIABLE When the menu key
COM-VAR is pressed, the COMMON VARIABLE screen is displayed. The common variable contents are displayed for the variable command in a machining program.
Common variable data can also be set or changed on the COMMON VARIABLE screen. The common variable configuration varies depending on the number of variables defined in the
specifications. For 100 variables, #100~#149 and #500~#549 are assigned (7-page configuration).
RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU
[COMMON VARIABLE] MONITOR 7.1/11 #
Display item Explanation # 100 -123456.7890 101 12.3456 102
The variable numbers and contents are displayed. If variable data is "null" (Note), the data display field will be blank. If the number of columns of data is too large (the data contains more than six characters in the integer part or more than four characters in the fraction part), the exponent will be used for display. (Note) In terms of calculation, a "null" setting is handled in the
same manner as "0". However, it is not handled in the same manner as "0" when using the condition expressions EQ and NE.
" " display: Indicates that this is a common variable independent for the systems in a multiple system.
When there is only one system, " " will display regardless of the parameter (#1303, #1304) setting.
2. Monitor 2.7 COMMON VARIABLE
I-72
2.7.1 Common Variable Display (1) When a common variable command exists, if the block is executed, the execution result is displayed.
# 100 -123456.7890 101 0.0000 102
# 100 -123456.1234 101 12.3456 102
(Example) The following machining program is executed. #101=12.3456
(2) When a command to set variable names for common variables #500~#519 by user macro exists, if the block is executed, the setup variable name is displayed.
Variable name setting and reference commands require the user macro specifications and are limited to 20 common variables #500~#519. The variable name is a string of up to seven alphanumeric characters beginning with an alphabetic character. For common variables #500~#519, the variable numbers, data, and variable names are displayed as shown below:
# 500 -123456.7890 ABCDEFG 501 100.0000 502 999.9000
(Example) The following machining program is executed. SETVN 501 [POINTER, COUNTER];
RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU
[COMMON VARIABLE] MONITOR 7.6/11 # 500 -123456.7890 ABCDEFG 501 100.0000 POINTER 502 999.9000 COUNTER 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 # ( ) DATA ( ) NAME ( )
2. Monitor 2.7 COMMON VARIABLE
I-73
2.7.2 Common Variable Setting (1) Common variable data setting To set common variable data, set the variable number in # ( ) and common variable data in DATA ( ),
then press the
INPUT key. (2) Setting variable names of common variables #500~#519 To set a variable name, set the variable number in # ( ) and the variable name in NAME ( ), then
press the
INPUT key. Only 20 common variables #500~#519 allow variable name setting. The variable name is a string of up to seven alphanumeric characters beginning with an alphabetic character.
If both data and variable names are set for variable numbers (#500~#519), the data and variable name can be set at a time.
(3) If the
INPUT key is pressed after the variable number and data (or variable name) are set, the setup data (or variable name) is displayed at the variable number position. The variable number in the setting area # ( ) is automatically incremented (to the next number) and the contents of DATA ( ) and NAME ( ) disappear.
(4) If a variable number and data (or variable name) not listed on the selected page are set, when the
INPUT key is first pressed, the screen is changed to the page corresponding to the setup variable number. If again the
INPUT key is pressed, the data (or variable name) is set and displayed at the position of the corresponding variable number.
(5) Whenever the
or
key is pressed for the variable number displayed in # ( ), the variable number can be incremented or decremented by one.
2.7.3 Common Variable Data Deleting To delete all data being set as common variables, at a time, press the
SHIFT
C.B CAN keys, then press the
INPUT key. This deletes the data displayed one screen.
In this case, data on the other screens are not deleted. If all data on all screens are desired to be deleted, repeat the above operation for all screens.
When
SHIFT
C.B CAN keys are pressed, only the display is deleted. When the
INPUT key is then pressed, the variable data is deleted. This delete operation causes the common variable data to be "null".
(Note1) If parameter #1128 RstVC1 is ON, the common variable data will be cleared to "null" when the system is reset. If parameter #1129 PwrVC1 is ON, the common variable data will be cleared to "null" when the power is turned ON.
(Note2) If any other key has been pressed before the
INPUT key is pressed, the variable data will not be deleted.
2. Monitor 2.8 LOCAL VARIABLE
I-74
2.8 LOCAL VARIABLE When the menu key
LOC-VAR is pressed, the LOCAL VARIABLE screen is displayed. Local variables #1 to #33 are provided for each user macro subprogram call level. 33-local variable data is
displayed per page and five-page configuration of levels 0 to 4 is used.
RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU
[LOCAL VARIABLE] MONITOR 8. 1/ 5 DISP LV. (0) ACT. LV. (1) A 1 -12345.6789 F 9 Q 17 Y 25 B 2 12.345 10 R 18 Z 26 C 3 H 11 S 19 27 I 4 12 T 20 28 J 5 M 13 U 21 29 K 6 14 V 22 30 D 7 15 W 23 31 E 8 16 X 24 32 33
Display item Explanation A 1 -12345.6789 B 2 12.3450 C 3
The local variable numbers and contents are displayed. The alphabetic character preceding each local variable number is argument code. None of G, L, N, O, and P can be used as arguments and are displayed. 33 local variables (#1 to #33) exist for each user macro subprogram call level of depth. If variable data is "null" (Note), the data display field will be blank. If the number of columns of data is too large (the data contains more than six characters in the integer part or more than four characters in the fraction part), the exponent will be used for display. (Note) In terms of calculation, a "null" setting is handled in the
same manner as "0". However, it is not handled in the same manner as "0" when using the condition expressions EQ and NE.
ACT. LV. (1) This indicates the level of depth during user macro subprogram control execution. (0): User macro is not called. (1): User macro call level 1 (2): User macro call level 2 (3): User macro call level 3 (4): User macro call level 4
2. Monitor 2.8 LOCAL VARIABLE
I-75
Display item Explanation
This indicates the modal state of the operation control status by the #3003, #3004 command. FEED-HOLD : Is displayed when command is programmed with
#3004 bit 0 set to 1, indicating that feed hold is invalid.
OVERRIDE : Is displayed when command is programmed with #3004 bit 1 set to 1, indicating that cutting override is invalid.
EXACT : Is displayed when command is programmed with #3004 bit 2 set to 1, indicating that the G09 (block deceleration check) command is invalid.
SNGL-BLOCK: Is displayed when command is programmed with #3003 bit 0 set to 1, indicating that block stop is invalid.
MST-FIN : Is displayed when command is programmed with #3003 bit 1 set to 1, indicating the state of proceeding to the next block without waiting for the M, S, T command completion signal.
2.8.1 Local Variable Data Display (1) When local variable #1~#33 command exists in user macro or argument specification is made in user
macro subprogram call, if the block is executed, the execution result is displayed.
DISP LV. (1) ACT. LV. (0) A 1 0.0000 B 2 0.0000 C 3 0.0000 I 4
DISP LV. (1) ACT. LV. (1) A 1 1.0000 B 2 2.0000 C 3 3.0000 I 4
(Example) When the following machining program is executed and user macro subprogram is called, data as shown in the right is displayed on the page of local variable display level (1): G65 P1 A1. B2. C3. ;
2. Monitor 2.8 LOCAL VARIABLE
I-76
(2) The relationship between the user macro subprogram call execution and display levels is as shown below:
Display level (0) 1 0.1000 2 0.2000 3 0.3000 16
#1=0.1 #2=0.2 #3=0.3 G65 P1A1. B2. C3. ; M02;
G65P 10A10. B20. C30; M99;
M99;
G65 P1000A1000. B2000 ; M99;
G65 P100A100. B200. ; M99;
Display of level 0
Display of level 1
Display of level 2
Display of level 3
Display of level 4
Display level (0) 17 33
Display level (1) 17 33
Display level (2) 17 33
Display level (3) 17 33
Display level (4) 17 33
Display level (2) 1 10.0000 2 20.0000 3 30.0000 16
Display level (3) 1 100.0000 2 200.0000 3 16
Display level (4) 1 1000.0000 2 2000.0000 3 16
Main (Level 0) 01 (Macro Level 1) 010 (Macro Level 2) 0100 (Macro Level 3) 01000 (Macro Level 4)
Display level (1) 1 1.0000 2 2.0000 3 3.0000 16
(3) A local variable display page is selected by using the page keys
PREVIOUS PAGE ,
NEXT PAGE . Display can be
changed as desired independently of the executing level. (Note) The local variables are not cleared even when power is turned OFF. They are cleared when a
macro is called.
3. Tool Offset (L system)
I-77
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
3 (I). Tool Offset (L system) The following menu will appear when the function key
TOOL PARAM is pressed.
PARAM menu display (No.1 to 4) TOOL menu display (No.1 to 4) T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU
Menu selection keysPrevious page key Next page key
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
TOOL menu (No.1 to 4)
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
PARAM menu (No.1 to 4)
TOOL TIP
OFFSET #1 to #10
TOOL DATA
#1 to #10
NOSE-R
#1 to #10
TOOL LIFE DATA
#1~#10
: :
# to #
: :
# to #
: :
# to #
: :
# to #
WORK PROCESS I/O BASE PARAM
SETUP PARAMETER
CONTROL
AXIS
BARRIER PARAM
PARAM
PARAM
PARAM
Refer to PARAMETERS.
MENU
CAUTION
If a tool offset or workpiece coordinate system offset is changed during automatic operation (including during single block stop), the new offset is validated from the command of the next block or blocks onwards.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.1 Wear Data
I-78
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
3.1 Wear Data
The TOOL TIP OFFSET screen will appear when the menu key
T-OFSET is pressed.
T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU
[TOOL TIP OFFSET] TOOL 1.1/4 [POSITION] X 0.000 #I :INC. #A :ABS. Z 0.000 # C 0.000 1 X 0.050 Z 0.020 C 0.100 2 X 0.100 Z 0.050 C 0.010 3 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 4 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 5 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 6 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 7 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 8 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 9 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 10 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 # ( ) X ( ) Z ( ) C ( )
Set the tool nose wear for each tool used. When the tool compensation No. is designated by the tool command (T command), compensation is carried out matching the tool length of the next screen.
X axis offset X axis tool length offset + X axis wear offset Z axis offset Z axis tool length offset + Z axis wear offset C axis offset (additional axis) C axis tool length offset + C axis wear offset Data Function X X axis tool nose wear
compensation Z Z axis tool nose wear
compensation
Tool nose
Z axis tool nose wear compensation amount
X axis tool nose wear compensation amount
Z
X
C Additional axis tool nose wear
compensation
(Note 1) Whether to apply the tool nose wear compensation of the additional axis on the 3rd axis or 4th axis can be selected with the parameter (#1520 Tchg34).
(Note 2) For multiple system Tool data can be provided for each system, or common tool data can be used for the systems. Select with parameter (#1501 MemTol). Parameter #1501 MemTol 0: Tool data for each system 1: Tool data common for all systems When common tool data is used for the systems, the tool data on the System 1 screen and
System 2 screen will have the same values.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.1 Wear Data
I-79
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
3.1.1 Setting Tool Offset Data
(1) To set the tool offset data, set the offset memory No. in # ( ), and set the offset data in the setting areas corresponding to wear data, tool length data and tool nose data. Then press the
INPUT key. (2) If the
INPUT key is pressed after the offset memory No. and tool offset data are set, the tool offset data set in the corresponding offset memory No. position is displayed. The offset memory No. in # ( ) of the setting area is incremented by 1, and the contents in DATA ( ) disappear. The No. is not incremented when parameter #1124 ofsfix is 1.
(3) If tool offset data and offset memory Nos. other than those in the display are set, the screen changes to the screen corresponding to the set offset memory No. when the
INPUT key is first pressed. The offset memory is displayed when the
INPUT key is pressed again. (4) By pressing the
and
keys, the offset memory No. displayed in # ( ) can be continuously incremented or decremented by one.
(5) Tool offset data setting range
Screen Item Function #1003 iunit Setting range (unit)
B 9999.999 (mm) C 999.9999 (mm) TOOL TIP
OFFSET
X, Z, C Tool wear
D 99.99999 (mm) B 9999.999 (mm) C 999.9999 (mm) TOOL DATA
X, Z, C Tool length offset
D 99.99999 (mm) B 9999.999 (mm) C 999.9999 (mm)
R Tool radius (nose R)
D 99.99999 (mm) B 999.999 (mm) C 99.9999 (mm)
r Tool radius (nose R) wear
D 9.99999 (mm)
NOSE-R
P Tool nose point 0~8
(Note) When parameter #1019 dia (diameter command) is set to 0, set the radius. When it is set to 1, set the diameter.
3.1.2 Erasing the Tool Offset Data
(1) Erasing the display screen units Ten sets of tool offset data units are displayed on one screen. To set all the displayed offset data to 0, press the
SHIFT key, the
C.B CAN key, and finally the
INPUT key.
(Note) If any other key has been pressed before the
INPUT key is pressed, the offset data will not be erased.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.1 Wear Data
I-80
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
3.1.3 Tool Wear and Tool Length Data Setting Mode (incremental/absolute)
There are two types of selection method in the absolute value setting or incremental value setting for the tool offset data: the mode selection method and the menu selection method. The required method is selected with the parameter #1136 optype.
Absolute setting
(Old) Incremental setting (New)
(Example) Incremental/absolute value setting
Setting Display Incremental value setting # (2) ( - 0.1) #2 X-100.100 Absolute value setting # (2) ( - 100.1) #2 X-100.100
Display #2 X -100.000
(1) Mode selection method (#1136=0) (a) Change over to the incremental value setting mode
Set I in # ( ), then press the
INPUT key. # ( I) X ( ) Z ( )
[TOOL DATA]
#I:INC. #A:ABS.
"#1: INC." is highlighted, and the mode becomes the incremental value setting mode.
(b) Change over to the absolute value setting mode
Set A in # ( ), then press the
INPUT key. # ( A) X ( ) Z ( )
[TOOL DATA]
#I:INC. #A:ABS.
"#A: ABS." is highlighted, and the mode becomes the absolute value setting mode.
(Note) The mode is held even if the screen is changed or the power is turned OFF.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.1 Wear Data
I-81
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
(2) Menu selection method (#1136=1) (a) Change over to the incremental value setting mode
Set value in #( ), X( ) or Z( ), then press the + INPUT key.
[TOOL TIP OFFSET] TOOL 2.1/4 #I : INC. #A : ABS. #1 X 0.000 Z 0.000 2 X 0.000 Z 0.000 3 X 0.000 Z 19.700
: : : : : : T M # ( 4 ) X ( ) Z ( )
[POSITION] X 123.456 Z 345.678
+INPUT =INPUT RETURN
(b) Change over to the absolute value setting mode
Set value in #( ), X( ) or Z( ), then press the = INPUT key.
[TOOL TIP OFFSET] TOOL 2.1/4 #I : INC. #A : ABS. #1 X 0.000 Z 0.000 2 X 0.000 Z 0.000 3 X 0.000 Z 19.700
: : : : : : T M # ( 4 ) X ( ) Z ( )
[POSITION] X 123.456 Z 345.678
+INPUT =INPUT RETURN
* When the cursor is moved to X( ) or Z( ) then the data key is pressed, =INPUT,+INPUT menu will
appear automatically. (c) Supplement If INPUT key is pressed while = INPUT, + INPUT are displayed, the offset data can be set for mode
selection method. = INPUT, + INPUT are displayed until BACK menu key is pressed or other screens are selected. The screen selection menu is displayed when TOOL OFFSET screen is selected again after other
screens are selected once. Mark of the screen selection menu indicates that the operation menu exist on the screen being
displayed. The operation menu is invalid during the tool measurement with manual tool length measurement
function. The operation menu during the tool measurement operates as follows. 1) When the screen select menu is displayed + INPUT, = INPUT dont appear during the tool measurement. If = INPUT, + INPUT with mark
are pressed during the tool measurement, ERROR (E74) will occur. 2) When the operation menu is displayed If = INPUT, + INPUT are pressed during the tool measurement, ERROR (E74) will occur. = INPUT, + INPUT are invalid during the manual numerical command mode. If = INPUT, + INPUT are pressed during the manual numerical command mode, ERROR (E74) will
occur. If the screen selection menu displayed with mark is pressed during the manual numerical command mode, ERROR (E74) will occur.
When the offset memory No. not displayed on the screen is set in setting area # ( ), the screen corresponding to the offset memory No. set in will appear by pressing = INPUT,+ INPUT key of one time. The offset data will be set by pressing = INPUT, + INPUT key again.
When the tool nose point data is set on the NOSE-R screen, the absolute setting is selected whichever of = INPUT and + INPUT key is pressed.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data
I-82
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
3.2 Tool Length Data
The TOOL DATA screen will appear when the menu key
T-DATA is pressed.
T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU
[TOOL DATA] TOOL 2.1/4 [MACHINE] X 123.456 #I :INC. #A :ABS Z 345.678 # C 0.000 1 X -12.345 Z 23.456 C 0.000 2 X -100.100 Z 10.123 C 0.000 3 X 55.123 Z 100.234 C 0.000 4 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 5 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 6 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 7 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 8 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 9 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 10 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 T M ( ) X ( ) Z ( ) C ( )
Set the tool length in respect to the program basic position of each tool used. When the tool compensation No. is designated by the tool command (T command), compensation is carried out matching the wear data of the previous screen. Generally, the program basic point position is either the turret center position or the basic tool nose position. (1) Turret center position
Data Function X X axis tool length offset Z Z axis tool length offset C Additional axis tool length offset
MACHINE Same value as on the MONITOR screen.
Program basic position
Z axis tool length offset
X axis tool length offset
(2) Basic tool nose position
Z axis tool length offset
Tool used for work
Basic tool
X axis tool length offset
Basic position
(Note) Whether to apply the tool length offset of the additional axis on the 3rd axis or 4th axis can be
selected with the parameter (#1520 Tchg34).
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data
I-83
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
3.2.1 Manual Tool Length Measurement I
(1) Outline This function automatically calculates the amount of tool length offset, by moving the tool to the measurement point with the manual feed. There are two types of measurement methods in manual tool length measurement I: the basic point method and the measurement value input method. The required method is selected by setting parameter #1102 tlm. (a) Basic point method
Obtain the tool length with the tool nose placed on the measurement point.
Measurement point
Set the measurement point in parameter #2015 tlml beforehand.
(b) Measurement value input method Actually cut the workpiece. Measure its dimensions, and obtain the tool length from the measured values.
Workpiece
Measurement basic point
Measurement value
The measurement basic point is characteristic for each machine (the center of the chuck face, etc.).
(Note) The tool length from tool length measurement I is as follows, depending on the whether the 1st reference point coordinate values have been set.
If the 1st reference point coordinate values have been set:
X-axis tool length
Program basic position
Z-axis tool length
If the 1st reference point coordinate values have been set, the tool length is the distance from the tool's hypothetical nose to the tool basic position.
If the 1st reference point coordinate values have not been set:
Z-axis tool length
X-axis tool length
If the 1st reference point coordinate values are set to "0", the tool length is the distance from the tool's hypothetical tool nose to the machine basic position.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data
I-84
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
(2) Basic point method Set the type selection to the basic point method. (Set #1102 tlm to 0). To carry out the basic point method, a point to place the tool nose on (measurement point) is required. Set the measurement point in parameter #2015 tlml beforehand.
Measurement point
Z-axis + tlml
(Note) Always set the measurement
point with the radius, regardless of the diameter/ radius command.
Set the measurement point in the machine coordinate system.
Tool length = Machine value - Measurement point (tlml)
The expression above is used for automatic calculation in the basic point method. When the tool nose is placed on the measuring point, the distance from the tool nose to the tool length basic point is calculated.
Z-axis tool length
X-axis tool length
Tool nose
Tool length basic point
< Measuring procedure for the basic point method >
(1) Select the TOOL DATA screen. (2) Set the tool No. to be measured in #
( ). (Select the tool before this step. It can be selected using a manual numerical command.)
(Example) Select tool length No. "1".
(3) Manually place the tool nose on the
measuring point.
[TOOL DATA] TOOL 2.1/4 [MACHINE] X 212.350 #I :INC. #A :ABS Y 210.100 #1 X 0.000 Z 0.000 2 X 0.000 Z 0.000 3 X 0.000 Z 0.000 : : : : : : T M # ( 1 ) X ( ) Z ( )
1
Measurement point
Manual operation
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data
I-85
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
(4) Select the axis to be measured.
X
Z Press the address key of each axis. The selection is canceled by pressing the same address key twice. Measure the X and Z axes.
X axis
Z axis
# ( 1 ) X ( ) Z ( )
X
Z
(Note 1) (Note 2)
Characters are reversed.
No data must be set.
(5) The data is automatically calculated and written. (The data is written for the axis shown in highlighted characters.)
INPUT Confirm that the data has been written to X and Z of tool No. "1". Repeat the above steps for each tool.
#1 X 12.350 Z 10.100 2 X 0.000 Z 0.000 3 X 0.000 Z 0.000 # ( 2 ) X ( ) Z ( )
(Note 3)
Incremented The reversed character returns to usual display.
(Note 1) If the screen is changed back to the TOOL DATA screen after axis selection (after the characters
are highlighted), the selection is invalidated (the characters are not highlighted). (Note 2) If an axis having an error (reference point return incomplete axis, etc.) is selected, the characters
will not be highlighted. An error message will appear. (Note 3) For a diameter command, the diameter value is written. For a radius command, the radius value is written.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data
I-86
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
(3) Measurement value input method Set the type selection to the measurement value input method. (Set #1102 tlm to 1). To carry out the measurement value input method, a workpiece for measuring is required. To measure the workpiece, set the basic point in parameter #2015 tlml beforehand.
(Note) Always set the measurement basic point with the radius, regardless of the diameter/ radius command. Set the measurement basic point in the machine coordinate system.
Measurement basic point
X-axis measurement value
X-axis + tlml
Measurement basic point
Z-axis + tlml Z-axis measurement value
Tool length = Machine value - Measurement basic point (tlml) - Measurement value The expression above is used for automatic calculation in the measurement value input method.
Z-axis tool length
X-axis tool length
Tool nose
Tool length basic point
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data
I-87
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
< Measuring procedure for the measuring value input method >
(1) Select the TOOL DATA screen. (2) Set the tool No. to be measured in #
( ). (Select the tool before this step. It can be selected using a manual numerical command.)
(3) Cut the surface corresponding to the
axis to be measured. To measure the X axis, cut the workpiece
in the longitudinal direction.
(For the Z axis, execute face turning.) (4) Do not retract the tool at the finish point
of the cutting, but press address key of the axis to be measured.
[TOOL DATA] TOOL 2.1/4 [MACHINE] X 212.350 #I :INC. #A :ABS Y 210.100 #1 X 0.000 Z 0.000 2 X 0.000 Z 0.000 3 X 0.000 Z 0.000 : : T M # ( 1 ) X ( ) Z ( )
(Example) Select tool length No."1".
X-axis measurement
X
In this way the machine coordinate values of the measured axis are stored in the memory. They are canceled by pressing the same key twice. Also repeat steps (3) and (4) for
the Z axis
X axis measurement...
# ( 1 ) X ( ) Z ( )
(Note 1) (Note 2)
Character is reversed.
(5) Retract the tool, and stop the spindle. (6) Measure the workpiece, and set the measurement values in the setting areas of each axis. Set the
values for all axes shown in highlighted characters.
(Example)
# ( 1 ) X (10.0) Z (35. 0 ) (Note 3)
X-axis diameter command example Cutting surface
Measurement basic point
10.0
35.0
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data
I-88
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
(7) The data is automatically calculated and written. (The data is written for the axis shown in highlighted characters.)
INPUT # 1 X 12.350 Z 10.000 2 X 0.000 Z 0.000 3 X 0.000 Z 0.000 # ( 2 ) X ( ) Z ( )
(Note 4)
Incremented The reversed character returns to usual display.
Blanked
Repeat the above steps for each tool.
(Note 1) If the screen is changed back to the TOOL DATA screen after the characters are highlighted, the characters will return to the usual display. Retry processing, beginning with step (3) or (4).
(Note 2) If an axis having an error (reference point return incomplete axis, etc.) is selected, the characters will not be highlighted. An error message will appear.
(Note 3) For a diameter command, the diameter value is written. For a radius command, the radius value is written. (Note 4) An error occurs in the following cases: # ( 1) X ( ) Z ( 35.0) ... The X axis measurement value was not set.
# ( 1) X ( 10.0) Z ( 35.0) ... The character was not highlighted although the X axis measurement value was set.
In these cases the status is held, so reset correctly and then repress
INPUT key.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data
I-89
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
3.2.2 Manual Numeric Command Operation on the TOOL DATA Screen (M, T)
When carrying out a manual numeric command of the TOOL OFFSET screen, the mode must first be changed from the normal data setting mode to the manual numeric command mode. M and T commands can be executed by screen operation in this mode.
(1) Changing from the normal data setting mode to the manual numerical command mode A cursor appears in the data setting area in the normal data setting mode, but a cursor does not appear in the manual numerical command mode. Confirm that the mode has changed over by checking this difference. The operation is as follows:
T M
#( )DATA ( )
Set
M (manual) in the first set of parentheses in the setting area.
T M
#( M )DATA ( )
1) This operation is the same for M or T
commands.
Press the
INPUT key. The mode changes to the manual numerical command mode.
T M
#( )DATA ( )
1) The data in the setting area is cleared, and
the cursor disappears from the screen. (2) Executing the manual numeric command ..... Carry out this step after (1) above. 1. Press the address key corresponding to the command. The display area of the corresponding
command value is highlighted, and a manual numeric command input status results. Execute tool function commands with
T , and miscellaneous function commands with
M . 2. Key-input the numerical value to be commanded. 3. Press the
INPUT key. The command is executed.
(Note) The manual numeric command operation is the same as the operation on the POSITION screen. Refer to the section on manual numeric commands for the MONITOR and POSITION screens for details.
(3) Operation for returning the mode from the manual numeric command mode to the normal data setting
mode
Press the
key. The normal data setting mode returns.
T20 M6
#( )DATA ( )
1) The cursor appears in the first set of
parentheses, and the normal setting mode is enabled.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data
I-90
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
3.2.3 Manual Tool Length Measurement II
(1) Outline By using a device having a touch sensor, the tool compensation amount can be calculated just by contacting the tool nose against the touch sensor with manual feed. The calculated results are stored in the tool compensation amount memory. After setting the tool compensation amount for each tool, the Z axis external workpiece coordinate offset data can be set by cutting the edges of the workpiece with manual operation and inputting the workpiece measurement signal.
(2) Detailed explanation
(a) Tool compensation amount measurement
X axis tool compensation amount
Z axis tool compensation amount
X axis contact surface
X axis + contact surface
Z axis + contact surface
Z axis contact surface
Z axis
X axis
Program basic position
1) Measurement method 1. Set the machine coordinate values of the touch sensor's contact surface in the parameters
beforehand as the measurement basic value. 2. Select the tool for which the tool compensation amount is to be measured. 3. Using manual feed, contact the nose of the tool against the touch sensor. The tool compensation amount will be calculated from the machine coordinate value when the
touch sensor is contacted and the measurement basic value, and will be saved in the memory as the tool compensation amount.
Tool compensation amount = Machine coordinate value measurement basic value (sensor position)
After measuring, the tool wear amounts for the individually designated tool numbers are
cleared.
2) Number of set systems and axes The system 1 X (1st axis), Z (2nd axis), additional axis, and system 2 X (1st axis), Z (2nd axis), additional axis can be set. The additional axis is determined with the #1520 Tchg34 additional axis tool compensation operation selection parameter.
#1520 Tchg34 Additional axis 0 3rd axis selection 1 4th axis selection
Note that the tools in the two systems cannot be measured simultaneously.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data
I-91
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
(b) Z axis workpiece coordinate offset data measurement
Machine coordinate zero point
Workpiece coordinate zero point
X axis
Z axis
Turret
Workpiece
1) Setting method 1. Select the tool and cut the workpiece edge. 2. When the workpiece measurement signal is input, the Z axis external workpiece coordinate
offset data will be calculated from the machine coordinate value, the length of the tool used and the tool nose wear compensation amount. This value will be saved in the memory.
2) No. of set systems and axes
The external workpiece coordinate offset for the system 1 Z axis (2nd axis) and system 2 Z axis (2nd axis) can be set. Note that the workpiece coordinate values for the two systems cannot be measured simultaneously.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data
I-92
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
(3) Operation flow
Start of operation
Measure other axes?
Zero point return
End of operation
Select manual mode
Turn tool measurement mode [TLMS] ON
Set No. of tool to be measured
Contact tool against sensor
Retract tool
Set measurement basic value
Select tool
Cut workpiece edges
Input workpiece measurement signal
Turn tool measurement mode [TLMS] OFF
Measure other tools?
Yes
No
Yes
No
Turn ON Y229 (tool measurement mode).
Preset the following axis specification parameter as the sensor position. #2015 tlml, #2016 tlml+
Turn OFF Y229 (tool measurement No.)
Turn ON Y329 (workpiece measurement No.)
Set the compensation No. of the tool to be measured in the R register. Tool No.: R2970, Wear data compensation No.: R186
Set the compensation No. of the tool to be used for cutting in the R register.
The tool length offset amount is automatically calculated from the contacted position, and is stored in the tool compensation amount memory. Tool compensation amount = Machine coordinate value Measurement basic value (Sensor position) The wear amount is cleared after measurement.
The Z axis workpiece coordinate offset will be measured and set in the external workpiece offset. Workpiece coordinate offset = Machine coordinate value Tool compensation data
Interface and operation with NC
Do not move the tool in the Z axis direction after cutting.
The axis movement will stop, and can be moved only in the direction away from the sensor.
External workpiece offset
The tool compensation amount is measured one axis at a time.
Tool compensation amount
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data
I-93
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
(4) Explanation of operations
(a) Setting the tool compensation amount
1) Zero point return After turning the power ON, establish the coordinate system by carrying out dog-type zero point return. When using the absolute position detection specifications, carry out initialization if the absolute position is not established.
2) Select the mode
Set the mode selection switch to the manual mode (either [handle], [jog] or [rapid traverse]).
3) Input the tool measurement mode signal Set the tool measurement mode signal to "1". The tool measurement mode is entered with steps 1), 2) and 3).
4) Confirm measurement basic value (sensor position)
The following parameter must be set before carrying out tool setter operations.
#2015 tlml, #2016 tlml+ (sensor position) Axis specification parameter p. 2
Zp
Xp Zm
Z axis
Xm
X axis
Xm : X axis sensor machine coordinate value (position measured by moving in direction) #2015 tlml X axis
Zm : Z axis sensor machine coordinate value (position measured by moving in direction) #2015 tlml Z axis
Xp : X axis + sensor machine coordinate value (position measured by moving in + direction) #2016 tlml+ X axis
Zp : Z axis + sensor machine coordinate value (position measured by moving in + direction) #2016 tlml+ Z axis
If the axis to be measured is the additional axis, the axis set with #2015 tlml-/#2016 tlml+ will differ according to the additional axis tool compensation operation selection parameter (#1520 Tchg34).
#1520 Tchg34 #2015 tlml/#2016 tlml+ setting 0 3rd axis 1 4th axis
5) Select the tool
Select the tool to be measured. Set the compensation No. of the tool to be selected as a BCD code in R2970. Set the compensation No. of the wear data to be cleared after measurement as a BCD code in R186. (The tool No. data is input from the PLC to the NC.)
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data
I-94
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
6) Measure tool compensation amount with sensor contact Approach the tool nose to the sensor with manual or handle feed. Stop the feed when the tool nose contacts the sensor. The tool length offset amount will be automatically calculated from the contacted position, and will be stored in the tool length memory. After measuring, the wear amount of the designated compensation No. will be cleared.
Note) The sensor contact surface is judged by the NC according to the manual axis movement
direction, so measure the tool compensation amount one axis at a time. The direction of the axis movement when the sensor contacts the tool will be output to R90 (R290).
Tool compensation amount = Machine coordinate value Measurement basic value
Z axis
X axis tool compensation amount
X axis Turret
Xm
Zm Z axis tool compensation amountMachine value
M ac
hi ne
v al
ue
Turret
Tool compensation amount calculation diagram
7) Retract the tool. 8) Set the tool compensation amount for the X axis and Z axis using steps 5) to 7). 9) Repeat steps 5) to 8) for the required tools.
10) Turn the tool measurement mode signal OFF.
This completes the measurement of the tool compensation amount.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data
I-95
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
(b) Setting the external workpiece coordinate offset data
1) Zero point return After turning the power ON, establish the coordinate system by carrying out dog-type zero point return. When using the absolute position detection specifications, carry out initialization if the absolute position is not established.
2) Select the mode
Set the mode selection switch to the manual mode (either [handle], [jog] or [rapid traverse]).
3) Input the tool measurement mode signal Set the tool measurement mode signal to "1". The tool measurement mode is entered with steps 1), 2) and 3).
4) Select the tool
Issue the T command with MDI operation, etc., and select the tool. Notes) 1. Set the compensation No. of the tool to be selected in the R register (R register
corresponding to the compensation No.). 2. Preset the tool length data and wear data for the tool to be used.
5) Cut workpiece edges
If the workpiece edges have not been cut, cut them slightly to flatten the workpiece edges. Notes) 1. Do not move the tool in the Z axis direction after cutting the workpiece edges. 2. If the edges do not need to be cut, position to the measurement position.
6) Set the Z axis external workpiece offset data with the workpiece measurement signal input
Turn ON the workpiece measurement signal. The Z axis external workpiece coordinate offset data will be automatically calculated from the machine value at the time the signal is turned ON and the tool compensation data of the tool used. The data will then be set.
(i) Details of automatic calculation expression
The external workpiece coordinate offset data is automatically calculated with the following expression. (Refer to "External workpiece coordinate offset calculation diagram")
External workpiece coordinate offset = Machine coordinate value Tool compensation data
The tool compensation data used for the measurement is selected with the base specification parameter "#1226 aux10 bit0".
aux10 bit0 Tool compensation data 0 Tool length data + tool nose wear data 1 Tool length data
Workpiece coordinate system zero point
Tool compensation amount
Basic machine coordinate zero point
External workpiece coordinate offset
Machine value
External workpiece coordinate offset calculation diagram
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data
I-96
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
(ii) Selected tool's compensation No. The number set in the R registers, shown in the table below, are used as the tool length and tool nose wear data compensation numbers for automatic calculation.
Compensation No. R registers
#1098 Tlno. #1130 set_t #1218 aux02 bit4
Tool length compensation No.
Tool nose wear compensation No.
0 0/1 0 1 0/1
R192, R193 R192, R193
0 R36, R37 R192, R193 0
1 R194, R195 R192, R193 1 1 0/1 R194, R195 R192, R193
Notes) 1. If the compensation No. is 0, the compensation amount will be calculated as "0". 2. If the compensation No. exceeds the number of offset sets in the specifications, the "E76
TOOL No. ERROR" error will occur. 3. The details of the parameters are shown below.
# Items Details 1098 Tlno. Tool length
offset number Specify the No. of digits in the tool length offset No. in the T command.
0: The 2 or 3 high-order digits are the tool No. The 2 or 1 Iow-order digits are the tool length offset and wear compensation Nos.
1: The 2 or 3 high-order digits are the tool No. and tool length offset Nos.
The 2 or 1 Iow-order digits are the wear compensation No. 1130 set_t Display
selected tool number
Specify the tool command value display on the POSITION screen.
0: T-modal value of program command is displayed. 1: Tool number sent from PLC is displayed.
1218 aux02 (bit4)
Tool number selection
Specify the R register that contains the tool number used for automatic calculation when measuring the coordinate offset of an external work piece.
0: Conforms to #1130 set_t. 1: Uses the tool number indicated by user PLC
7) Turn the tool measurement mode signal OFF. This completes the measurement of the external workpiece coordinate offset. When carrying out this operation independently, follow steps 1) to 7), and when carrying out after measuring the tool compensation amount, carry out steps 4) to 6) between 9) and 10) of "(a) Setting the tool compensation amount".
(5) Precautions
1) When entering the sensor area, the axis can move only in one direction selected from +X, X, +Z, Z, (+Y, Y). If two axes (ex. +X, Z) are moved simultaneously, it will not be clear which contact surface was contacted, so the measurement will not be made. Note that the error "E78 AX UNMATCH (TLM )" will occur and the movement will stop for safety purposes.
2) After entering the sensor area, if the tool nose is contacting the sensor, the axis can be moved only in the direction away from the sensor. (An interlock is applied on the entry direction by the NC.) The axis can move in both directions when the tool nose is separated from the sensor. The conditions for the axis to move in both directions are as follow: 1. The sensor signal has been OFF for more than 500ms 2. The axis has moved 100m or more after the sensor signal has turned OFF. 1 and 2 can be selected with the parameter #1227 aux11/bit 2 tool setter chattering measures. The interlock direction during interlock is output to R91 (R291).
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.3 Tool Nose Data
I-97
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
3.3 Tool Nose Data
The NOSE-R screen will appear when the menu key
NOSE-R is pressed.
T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU
[NOSE - R] TOOL 3.1/4 # 1 R 5.000 r 0.045 P 3 2 R 10.000 r 0.099 P 8 3 R 6.000 r 0.099 P 2 4 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 3 5 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 3 6 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 3 7 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 3 8 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 3 9 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 3 10 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 3 # ( ) R ( ) r ( ) P ( )
Set the tool nose radius R (nose R), wear r, and tool nose point for each tool used. When the tool nose R compensation (G41, G42, G46) command is given, the tool nose is assumed to be a half-circular arc with radius R (R + r) corresponding to the tool No. Compensation is then carried out so that the half-circular arc contacts the designated machining program path.
Data Function P0 to P8 Tool nose point
R Tool radius (nose R) (no sign) r Wear (no sign)
X
2
7
3
6 1
0
8
5
4
Z r
R
3
Tool nose point
(Note) The incremental value/absolute value setting mode changeover follows the tool length data setting mode for R, and the tool wear data setting mode for r.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.4 Tool Life Management I
I-98
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
3.4 Tool Life Management I (#1096 T_L type is 1)
The TOOL LIFE DATA screen will appear when the menu key
LIFE is pressed.
T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU
[TOOL LIFE DATA] TOOL 4.1/4 [TIME] [COUNT] [STATUS] # USED MAX USED MAX 1 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 2 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 3 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 4 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 5 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 6 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 7 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 8 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 9 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 10 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 # ( ) ( : : / : ) ( / ) ( : )
Tool life management is valid when parameter #1103 T_Life is set to 1. Tool life management is then carried out according to the tool usage time or the No. of times the tool is used (also called count). When the tool usage time reaches the service life time, or when the tool count exceeds the service life count, a tool life expiration signal (X20E) is output to the user PLC and the tool No. (#) is highlighted on the TOOL LIFE DATA screen. Tool life management is possible for up to 80 tools (tool Nos. 1 to 80). This function is useful for setting tool abrasion and wear data, and for knowing when to replace tools with new ones, etc.
Item Details Setting range
USED The cumulative time the tool is used. This timer value is incremented during cutting.
0 : 0 to 99 : 59 (h: min)
TIME
MAX The tool service lifetime setting. Set the max. time the tool can be used. Seconds are discarded.
0 : 0 to 99 : 59 (h: min) (0 : 0 = no warning given)
USED The cumulative count the tool is used. The counter value is incremented each time the tool is used.
0 to 9999 (times) COUNT
MAX The tool service life count. Set the max. count the tool can be used.
0 to 9999 (times) (0 : 0 = no warning given)
Left side
The tool life management status is indicated.
0: Not used 1: Current tool (tool being used) 2: Service lifetime (service life count) is exceeded.
0 to 2 STATUS
Right side (Machine maker free area) 0 to 99
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.4 Tool Life Management I
I-99
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
3.4.1 Tool Life Management Method
By setting the service lifetime (or service life count) to "0" for each tool, the following four tool life management methods can be selected.
Life management method Service lifetime setting
Service life count setting
1. Time only Set to "0". 2. Count only Set to "0". 3. Time and count 4. No management Set to "0". Set to "0".
(1) Tool life management by time
The cutting time (G01, G02, G33, etc.) after a tool selection (T) command is carried out is incremented to the usage time corresponding to the commanded tool. If the usage time reaches the service lifetime when a tool selection command is executed, a warning is output to the user PLC. When the usage time reaches the service lifetime, the corresponding tool No. (#) on the TOOL LIFE DATA screen is highlighted.
(2) Tool life management by count
The count for the commanded tool is incremented when the first cutting feed starts after a tool selection (T) command is carried out. If no cutting feed is executed after the selection of a tool, the count is not incremented. If the count equals the service life count for the commanded tool when a tool selection command is executed, a warning is output to the user PLC. When the count exceeds the service life count (when the cutting feed starts after a tool selection command), the corresponding tool No. (#) on the TOOL LIFE DATA screen is highlighted.
(3) Tool life management by time and count The tool life is managed simultaneously by time and count. If the usage time reaches the service lifetime, or the count equals the service life count for the commanded tool when a tool selection command is executed, a warning is output to the user PLC. When the usage time reaches the service lifetime, or when the count exceeds the service life count, the corresponding tool No. (#) on the TOOL LIFE DATA screen is highlighted.
(4) No management The usage time and count are incremented, but no warning is output to the user PLC, and the tool No. (#) on the TOOL LIFE DATA screen is not highlighted.
3.4.2 Conditions for Counting (incrementing)
The usage time (or count) is incremented when a cutting feed (G1, G2, G3, G33) is executed. Note that they are not incremented in the following conditions:
When the base specification parameter "#1103 T-Life" is OFF. During machine lock During miscellaneous function lock (input signal from the PLC) During dry run During single block operation When the count ON signal of the data used is OFF. (Input signal from the PLC)
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.4 Tool Life Management I
I-100
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
3.4.3 Setting Tool Life Management Data
(1) To set tool life management data, set the tool No. in # ( ). Then set the tool service lifetime and service life count data in the corresponding setting areas, and press the
INPUT key. (2) The operations in (1) update the tool life management data display, increment the tool No. in # ( ) by 1,
and deletes the service lifetime (life count) data in ( ). (3) If a tool No. and tool life management data is set for a tool No. other than the ones displayed, the screen
will change to one corresponding to the set tool No. when the
INPUT key is pressed once. The tool life management data can be set by pressing the
INPUT twice. (4) The tool No. that appears in # ( ) can be continually incremented or decremented by pressing the
and
keys. 3.4.4 Erasing Tool Life Management Data in Display Screen Units
Ten sets of tool life management data appear in one screen. All the displayed tool life management data (time-used, time-max, count-used, count-max) can be set to 0 by pressing the
SHIFT key, and then pressing the
C.B CAN key and
INPUT key.
(Note) If any other key has been pressed before the
INPUT key is pressed, the tool life management data will not be erased.
3.4.5 Precautions
(1) The cumulative time (count) is incremented, even if the service lifetime (service count) is set to "0". Note that a warning (TOOL LIFE EXPIRATION: X20E) is not output.
(2) For tool life management by time, a warning will not be output to the user PLC if the usage time reaches the service lifetime during cutting. Instead, the warning will be output when the next tool selection command is issued. During that interval, the usage time will continue to increment.
(3) When there are 20 offset pairs, the No. of tools whose lifetime can be managed is 20. (4) The TOOL LIFE screen cannot be selected in systems without the tool life management function. If the
tool life management menu key is pressed, alarm "E06 NO SPEC" will occur and the screen will not change.
(5) If a tool selection (T) command is carried out during cutting feed modal, the count will be incremented at that time.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.5 Tool Life Management II
I-101
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
3.5 Tool Life Management II (#1096 T_Ltype is 2)
The tools used are classified into several groups. With this tool life management with spare tool function, tool life (usage time, count) is managed for each group. When a tool's life is reached, an equivalent spare tool is selected in order from the group to which that tool belongs. (1) No. of tool life management tools : 1-system: max. 80 tool, 2-system: max. 40 tools/system (2) No. of groups : 1-system: max. 80 tool, 2-system: max. 40 tools/system (3) Group No. : 1 to 9999 (4) No. of tools per group : Max. 16 tools (5) Service lifetime : 0 to 999999 min. (approx. 16667 hours) (6) Service life count : 0 to 999999 times
3.5.1 Group Registration
(1) Tool life management screen A group's life management information is set and displayed.
T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU
[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4. 2/5 # G GROUP : 1234 FORM : 0 LIFE : 999999(MIN) # TOOL No. CMP.No. USED(MIN) ST TOOL No. CMP.No. USED(MIN) ST 1 111111 1 999999 2 9 123 9 000009 3 2 222222 2 999999 2 10 1234 10 000099 3 3 333333 3 999999 2 11 12345 11 000999 3 4 444444 4 999999 2 12 123456 12 123456 1 5 555555 5 999999 2 13 234567 13 000000 0 6 666666 6 999999 2 14 345678 14 000000 0 7 777777 7 999999 2 15 999999 15 000000 0 8 888888 8 999999 2 16 #(12) DATA(123456) (12) (123456) (1)
(Note) The (MIN) display following "LIFE" or "USED" will change according the method setting. FORM 0: Time (MIN) : Indicates that the data is displayed in minute units. 1: Count (SET) : Indicates that the data is displayed in count units.
1) Selecting a display group Select the group by setting # ( G) DATA (group No.). When the group No. is set, the tool life management information of the tools registered in that group will appear from #1 to #16. A highlighted # No. indicates that tool is a life-reached tool (or a skip tool). To display another group, set # ( G) DATA (group No.) again.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.5 Tool Life Management II
I-102
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
2) Registering a group Register a group by setting # ( G) DATA (group No. to be registered) (FORM) (LIFE).
Designate a group No. from 1 to 9999. Set FORM with for group life management by either time or count. 0: Time 1: Count If the FORM setting is omitted, the method becomes "0" (time). Set LIFE with the service life setting value for that group's tools. (0 to 999999). If the LIFE setting is omitted, the life setting value becomes "0". (Note 1) The FORM and LIFE setting values can only be changed for a group being displayed.
This is to prevent mistaken settings. The setting is made with # ( G) DATA ( ) (FORM) (LIFE).
(Only FORM and LIFE setting values can be changed.) (Note 2) FORM and LIFE data is common data within that group. To suppress the LIFE value of a
specific tool, adjust by setting the offset value for the USED data. In this case, ST will be set to 1 (current tool), and the following new tool selection signal will not be output at tool selection.
(Note 3) The USED data will be incremented when the LIFE data is 0, but no judgment will be made when the service life count is reached.
3) Deleting a group registration
The group being displayed and its data can be deleted by pressing
SHIFT +
C.B CAN +
INPUT keys.
4) Registering tools Set the tools in order from the first tool to be used. If multiple compensation Nos. are used with one tool, set the tool No. and respective compensation Nos. for each compensation No.
Tool No. : Set the tool No. (1 to 999999: differs according to the specifications) Compensation No. : Set the compensation No. (1 to 80: differs according to the specifications) USED : When the designated tool is other than a not-used tool, the initial incrementation value can be adjusted by setting the USED data. If no data is set, this value becomes 0. (Can be omitted.) ST : Designate whether the tool is a tool skip tool or not. (Can be omitted.)
If the data is not set, or if 0 to 2 is set, the data will be automatically set according to the relation with the USED data and LIFE data.
0: Not used tool 1: Current tool (tool being used) 2: Normal life-reached tool 3: Tool skip tool (Example) Setting to use multiple compensation Nos. with one tool.
# Tool No. Compensation No. 1 520000 11 ..... Equivalent to a T52000011 command. 2 520000 12 ..... Equivalent to a T52000012 command. 3 520000 13 ..... Equivalent to a T52000013 command. (Note) Tool life management is carried out in group units with this function. Thus, if a tool is set in a
different group, the life will be managed according to the respective group, and that tool cannot be managed correctly.
5) Deleting a tool registration
Set 0 in the tool No. of the # No. to be deleted. All data of that # No. will be deleted, and the subsequent # Nos. and data will all move up a line.
6) Clearing a tools USED data
Setting up the following can clear the USED data: 0 is set in the USED data of each tool. Put - in front of the # number of tool, and set that number with - in # ( ). When the USED data of the all registration tools of 1 group are cleared, -99 is set in #( ).
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.5 Tool Life Management II
I-103
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
7) Displaying multiple groups The LIFE management information of multiple groups is set and displayed in 1 screen according to the parameter (#1107 Tllfsc) setting.
#1107 Tllfsc setting value 0 1 2 No. of display groups 1 2 4
Maximum number of registered tools 16 8 4
[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.1/12 GROUP: 1 FORM:0 LIFE: 100(MIN) GROUP: FORM:1 LIFE: 100(MIN) # TOOLNo. CMP.No. USED(MIN) ST # TOOLNo. CMP.No. USED(SET) ST 1 1 1 100 2 1 21 21 100 2 2 2 2 0 3 2 22 22 100 2 3 3 3 0 3 3 23 23 100 2 4 4 4 50 1 4 24 24 100 2 5 5 5 0 0 5 25 25 100 2 6 6 6 0 0 6 26 26 100 2 7 7 7 0 0 7 27 27 100 2 8 8 8 0 0 8 28 28 100 2 #( )DATA( )( )( )( ) T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU I
2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The LIFE management information of 2 groups in 1 screen
[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.1/7 GROUP: 1 FORM:0 LIFE: 100(MIN) GROUP: FORM:1 LIFE: 100(MIN) # TOOLNo. CMP.No. USED(MIN) ST # TOOLNo. CMP.No. USED(SET) ST 1 1 1 100 2 1 21 21 100 2 2 2 2 0 3 2 22 22 100 2 3 3 3 0 3 3 23 23 100 2 4 4 4 50 1 4 24 24 100 2 GROUP: 3 FORM:0 LIFE: 300(MIN) GROUP: 4 FORM:1 LIFE: 400(MIN) # TOOLNo. CMP.No. USED(MIN) ST # TOOLNo. CMP.No. USED(SET) ST 1 29 29 100 1 1 33 33 0 0 2 30 30 0 0 2 34 34 0 0 3 31 31 0 0 3 35 35 0 0 4 32 32 0 0 4 36 36 0 0 #( )DATA( )( )( )( ) T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU LIFE
2
1
1 2 3 4
The LIFE management information of 4 groups in 1 screen
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.5 Tool Life Management II
I-104
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
(2) Registration group list screen
The life management data of the tool currently being used and the list of registered groups of tools are displayed. This page is mainly used for monitoring tool life data in group units.
T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU
[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4. 2/5
1) Display details < CHOSEN TOOL >: The life management information of the tool currently being used appears here. FORM : The incrementation unit of the life data appears here. 0: Time 1: Count ST : The tool status appears here. 0: Not used tool 1: Current tool (tool being used) 2: Normal life-reached tool 3: Tool skip tool TOTAL : For tools using multiple compensation Nos., the total of the usage data for each compensation No. appears here. If there is only one compensation No., the data will be the same as "USED". < GROUP LIST > : All registered group Nos. appear here. A highlighted group No. indicates that the lives of all tools registered in that group have been reached.
2) Erasing all registered data of a group All registered data (including the group No.) of a group can be erased by pressing
SHIFT +
C.B CAN +
INPUT keys.
3.5.2 Tool Life Incrementation Methods
The tool life can be incremented either by time method or by the No. of uses (count) method. The count method and timing for the No. of uses (count) method can be changed to type 2 with the parameter setting (#1277 ext13/bit0). If the USED data equals or exceeds the LIFE data as a result of incrementation, a spare tool will be selected from that tool's group by the next relevant group selection command (T****99). After that, the incrementation will be for the newly selected tool (the spare tool selected). If the life of all tools in a group is reached, and a spare tool cannot be selected, the incrementation will continue for the last tool selected.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.5 Tool Life Management II
I-105
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
(1) Time incrementation with the time method The time the tool is used in the cutting mode (G01, G02, G03, G31, G33, etc.) is incremented in 100ms units. The time is not incremented during dwell, machine lock, miscellaneous function lock, dry run or single block status.
(Note) The max. life value is 999999 min. The data on the TOOL LIFE screen is displayed in minute units.
(2) No. of uses (count) incrementation with the count method
(a) Type 1 (#1277 ext13/bit0: 0) Incrementation is carried out when the No. of the tool being used changes by the execution of a tool selection command (T****99) during the cutting mode (except during machine lock, miscellaneous function lock, dry run, and single block states). (If the mode never changes to the cutting mode after the tool No. changes, the count is not incremented.)
(Note) The max. life value is 999999 times. If only the compensation No. for the current tool changes, the count is not incremented. If the T code of the current tool is 12345678:
T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Compensation No.: The count is not incremented, even if this changes.
Tool No.: The count is incremented when this changes.
The count for group 01 is 1 time.
(Note) The count is for one program execution. If the program is executed again after resetting the count will be incremented.
The count for group 01 is 3 times.
<< Operation example >>
T0199 (1) : T0299 : T0199 (2) : T0299 : T0199 (3)
Program
T0199 (1) : T0199 : T0199
Program
(b) Type 2 (#1277 ext13/bit0: 1)
Only the group used for cutting from when the machining program starts to when it is reset is incremented by "1". The count is made at the reset. If recount M is commanded, the group used up to that point will be incremented by "1" in the counter.
(Note 1) A count is not made in the machine lock, miscellaneous function lock or dryrun states. (Note 2) During single block, select whether to count with the parameter. (Note 3) The maximum value of the life is 999999 times.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.5 Tool Life Management II
I-106
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
(3) Incrementation when using one tool with multiple compensation Nos. With this function, each registered T No. (tool No. + compensation No.) has independent USED data, so the count for a tool using multiple compensation Nos. is incremented for each compensation No. Thus, life management for that tool's USED data is carried out with the total of the USED data for each compensation. Because of this, when only one # No. is looked at on the screen, the tool status (ST) may be 2 (life-reached tool), although that tool's USED data has not yet reached the life of the tool. The total of the currently selected tool's USED data appears in "TOTAL" of the
Example of the screen display when using multiple compensation Nos.
Time method (life: 100000 min.) Count method (life: 100000 times)
The life of tool 101010 is the total count of #1 to #3.
The life of tool 101010 is the total usage time of #1 to #3.
# TOOL No. CMP.No. USED(MIN) ST
1 101010 1 40000 2
2 101010 2 40000 2
3 101010 3 30000 2
4 202020 4 20000 1
5 202020 5 20000 1
6 202020 6 15000 1
7 303030 7 0 0
# TOOL No. CMP.No. USED(SET) ST
1 101010 1 50000 2
2 101010 2 50000 2
3 101010 3 0 2
4 202020 4 40000 1
5 202020 5 40000 1
6 202020 6 0 1
7 303030 7 0 0
3.5.3 Parameters The tool life management specifications will differ according to parameter #1096 T_Ltype and #1106 Tcount. Confirm the explanation for the relevant setup parameter data item.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.6 Tool Registration
I-107
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
3.6 Tool Registration
The TOOL REGISTRATION screen will appear when the menu key
LIFE is pressed, and the screen is changed using the
NEXT PAGE key. The use of this screen differs according to the user PLC, so refer to the
instruction manual issued by the machine maker for details. 3.6.1 Outline of Functions
(1) Tools used can be registered in the magazine pot. (2) When the magazine pot and the tool No. are changed by a tool selection command or a tool
replacement command, the new tool No. is displayed. (3) Random data can be set in AUX ( ) in the setting area and processed as a sequence with the user PLC. (4) Tools can be registered in USAGE on the upper portion of the screen. The displayed name and
displayed No. can be changed. (5) The No. of tool registrations differs according to the specifications, but a max. of 80 tools can be
registered, with a max. of 4 digits in the tool Nos. (6) Tools can be selected by a manual numeric command.
T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU
[T-REGISTRATION] TOOL 2.1/2 HEAD NEXT-1 NEXT-2 NEXT-3 SEARCH 10 20 21 30 22 MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D 1 101 0 11 201 0 21 301 0 2 102 0 12 202 0 22 302 0 3 103 0 13 203 0 23 303 0 4 104 0 14 204 0 24 304 0 5 105 0 15 205 0 25 305 0 6 106 0 16 206 0 26 306 0 7 107 0 17 207 0 27 307 0 8 108 0 18 208 0 28 308 0 9 109 0 19 209 0 29 309 0 10 110 0 20 210 0 30 310 0 T 0 M MG( ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )
3.6.2 Tool Registration in the Magazine Pot
T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU
T 0 M MG( 1 ) TOOL( 1234 ) D( 2 ) AUX( ) Set 1 in MG ( ),
1234 in TOOL ( ), and 2 in D ( ).
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.6 Tool Registration
I-108
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
Press the
INPUT key. [T-REGISTRATION] TOOL 2.1/2 HEAD NEXT-1 NEXT-2 NEXT-3 SEARCH MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D 1 1234-0 11 21 2 12 22 3 13 23 4 14 24
The tool No. and data in D appear in the designated magazine pot, and the magazine No. in MG ( ) is incremented by 1. The data in the other ( ) disappears. When a No. other than the magazine No. in the data display area is set, the screen changes as follows: When the
INPUT key is pressed the 1st time, the screen corresponding to the magazine No. appears. When the
INPUT key is pressed the 2nd time, the data set in the data area appears.
(Note) Refer to the instruction manual issued by the machine maker for data on the function and purpose of the data in D.
3.6.3 Tool Registration in the Spindle, Standby and Indexing Areas
These commands are used to change the display data when the tool No. set in the magazine pot differs with the displayed tool No.
Press the
INPUT key.
Set N0 in MG ( ), and 8 in TOOL ( ).
Set to USAGE MG (N0) TOOL ( )
T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU
[T-REGISTRATION] TOOL 2.1/2 HEAD NEXT-1 NEXT-2 NEXT-3 SEARCH 10 20 21 30 22 MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D 1 101 0 11 201 0 21 301 0 2 102 0 12 202 0 22 302 0 3 103 0 13 203 0 23 303 0 4 104 0 14 204 0 24 304 0 5 105 0 15 205 0 25 305 0 6 106 0 16 206 0 26 306 0 7 107 0 17 207 0 27 307 0 8 108 0 18 208 0 28 308 0 9 109 0 19 209 0 29 309 0 10 110 0 20 210 0 30 310 0 T 0 M MG( ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )
"8" appears under USAGE in the data display area, and the display in the data setting area changes to MG (N1).
(Note) Although the title display in the upper portion of the screen differs according to the machine maker, the data is always set by an input of N0.
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.6 Tool Registration
I-109
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
3.6.4 Deleting Tool Registration Data
Press the
INPUT key. All data displayed in USAGE and MG1 to MGn is cleared to 0.
Set CL in MG ( ).
(Note) If any other key has been pressed before the
INPUT key is pressed, the tool registration data will not be deleted.
3.6.5 Manual Numeric Command Operation (M, T) on the TOOL REGISTRATION Screen
To carry out manual numeric commands on the TOOL REGISTRATION screen, the mode must first be changed from the normal data setting mode to the manual numeric command mode. M and T commands can be executed by screen operation in the manual numeric command mode.
(1) Changing from the normal data setting mode to the
manual numeric command mode A cursor appears in the data setting area in the normal data setting mode, but a cursor does not appear in the manual numeric command mode. Confirm that the mode has changed over by checking this difference. The operation is as follows:
Set
M (manual) in the first set of parentheses in the setting area.
T M
MG( M ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )
1) This operation is the same for M or T
commands.
Press the
INPUT key. The mode changes to the manual numerical command mode.
T M MG( ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )
1) The data in the setting area is cleared, and the cursor disappears from the screen.
T M
MG( ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )
3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.6 Tool Registration
I-110
Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.
(2) Executing the manual numeric command ..... Carry out this step after (1) above. 1) Press the address key corresponding to the command. The display area of the corresponding
command value is highlighted, and a manual numeric command input status results. Execute tool function commands with
T , and miscellaneous function commands with
M . 2) Key-input the numerical value to be commanded. 3) Press the
INPUT key. The command is executed.
(Note) The manual numeric command operation is the same as the operation on the POSITION screen. Refer to the section on manual numeric commands for the MONITOR and POSITION screens for details.
(3) Operation for returning the mode from the manual numeric command mode to the normal data setting mode
Press the
key. The normal data setting mode returns.
T20 M6 MG( ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )
1) The cursor appears in the first set of parentheses, and the normal setting mode is enabled.
3. Tool Offset (M system)
I-111
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
3 (II). Tool Offset (M system) The following menu will display if the function selection key
TOOL PARAM is pressed.
TOOL menu No.1 to 4
TOOL OFFSET #1 to #20
or #1 to #10
T- REGISTRATION MG 1 to MG 20
TOOL LIFE
: :
# to #
WORK PROCESS I/O BASE PARAM
SETUP PARAMETER
CONTROL
AXIS
BARRIER
PARAM
Refer to PARAMETERS.
#1 to #40 or #11 to #20
MG 61 to MG 80
MG 41 to MG 60
MG 21 to MG 40
TOOL DATA
: :
TOOL DATA
PARAM menu display (No.1 to 4) TOOL menu display (No.1 to 4)
OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU
Menu selection keysPrevious page key Next page key
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
PARAM menu (No.1 to 4)
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
PARAM
PARAM
PARAM
MENU
CAUTION
If a tool offset or workpiece coordinate system offset is changed during automatic operation (including during single block stop), the new offset is validated from the command of the next block or blocks onwards.
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset
I-112
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
3.1 Tool Offset When the menu key
OFFSET is presented, the TOOL OFFSET screen is displayed. (1) Tool offset memory (type I: parameter #1037 cmdtyp 1) Form compensation memory is not distinct from wear compensation memory. Set the sum amount of
form compensation and wear compensation. Offset data is common to the tool length, tool offset, and tool radius compensation. (2) Tool offset memory (type II: parameter #1037 cmdtyp 2) Set the form compensation amount and wear compensation amount separately. The form
compensation amount is separated into the length dimensions and diameter dimension. Of offset data, the length dimension data is used for tool length and the diameter dimension data is
used for tool radius compensation.
OFFSET REGIST LIFE NEMU
[TOOL OFFSET] TOOL 1.1/ 2 #A:ABS. #I:INC. [MACHINE] Z 0.000
SURFACE #0 = 50.000 # LENG WEAR RADIUS WEAR 1 120.000 0.020 50.000 0.099 2 100.000 0.004 30.000 0.000 3 100.000 0.000 60.000 0.010 4 20.000 0.005 150.000 0.008 5 20.000 0.530 150.000 0.059 6 300.000 0.032 50.000 0.111 7 250.000 0.000 50.000 0.000 8 150.000 0.006 80.000 0.009 9 200.000 0.000 150.000 0.003
10 500.000 0.667 100.000 0.888 T 0 M
OFFSET REGIST LIFE NEMU
[TOOL OFFSET] TOOL 1.1/ 2 #A:ABS. #I:INC. [MACHINE] Z 0.000
SURFACE #0 = 50.000 # 1 120.000 11 300.000 2 50.000 12 50.000 3 100.000 13 250.000 4 30.000 14 50.000 5 100.000 15 150.000 6 60.000 16 80.000 7 20.000 17 200.000 8 150.000 18 150.000 9 20.000 19 500.000
10 150.000 20 100.000 T 0 M #( ) DATA( )
......
......
......
......
Tool offset memory type I Tool offset memory type II Tool offset data can be set in either absolute or incremental value.
Display item Description #A: ABS. #I: INC. The valid setting mode, either absolute or incremental mode, is
displayed in reverse video. Before setting data, check that the setting mode is proper.
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset
I-113
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
3.1.1 Tool Offset Data Setting (1) For type I To set tool offset data, set the offset memory number in # ( ) and offset data in DATA ( ), then press
the
INPUT key. (2) For type II To set tool offset data, set the offset memory number in # ( ) and offset data in the setting area
corresponding to LENG, WEAR, RADIUS and WEAR, then press the
INPUT key. (3) If the
INPUT key is pressed after the offset memory number and tool offset data are set, the tool offset data set in the offset memory number position is displayed, the offset memory number in the setting area # ( ) is incremented by one, and the contents of DATA ( ) disappear. At the time, the cursor moves to the right end of the same setting field as the input time.
(4) If tool offset data is set with an offset memory number not contained in the displayed offset memory numbers, the screen changes to the screen corresponding to the setup offset memory number when the
INPUT key is first pressed. When the
INPUT key is pressed again, the tool offset data set in the offset memory number position is displayed.
(5) The offset memory number displayed in # ( ) can be consecutively incremented or decreased by one by pressing the
or
key. (6) To set the incremental mode, enter
in # ( ), then press the
INPUT key. In incremental mode, the set data is added to the data indicated in the display area. To cancel the incremental mode, enter
A in # ( ), then press the
INPUT key; the absolute mode is set. (For details, see Sections 3.1.3.)
3.1.2 Tool Offset Data Clear (1) Clear in display screen units 20 sets of tool offset data (10 sets for type II) are displayed on one screen. To clear all displayed offset
data, press the
SHIFT key, then press the
C.B CAN and
INPUT keys.
(Note) If any other key has been pressed before the
INPUT key is pressed, the offset data will not be cleared.
3.1.3 Tool Offset Data Setting Modes (Absolute and Incremental)
There are two types of selection method in the absolute value setting or incremental value setting for the tool offset data: the mode selection method and the menu selection method. The required method is selected with the parameter #1136 optype. (1) Mode selection method (#1136=0)
(a) Absolute value setting Change to the absolute value setting mode as follows:
Enter A in # ( ), then press the
INPUT key. # ( A) DATA ( )
[TOOL OFFSET]
#A:ABS. #I:INC.
"#A: ABS." is displayed in reverse video indicating that the absolute value setting mode is valid.
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset
I-114
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
Example of setting tool offset data in absolute mode
Radius comp. Absolute value 3.0 setting
Length comp. 40.0
Old New
Radius comp. 5.0
Length comp. Absolute value setting 37.0
Display #3 40.000
Setting Display # ( 3) ( 37) #3 37.000
(#3 length compensation data)
(b) Incremental value setting Change to the incremental value setting mode as follows:
[TOOL OFFSET]
#A:ABS. #I:INC.
Enter I in # ( ), then press the
INPUT
key. # ( I) DATA( )
"#I: INC." is displayed in reverse video indicating that the incremental value setting mode is valid.
Example of setting tool offset data in incremental value setting mode
Radius comp. Incremental -2.0 value setting
Length comp. 40.0
Old New
Radius comp. 5.0
Length comp. Incremental value setting -3.0
Display #3 40.000
Setting Display # ( 3) ( -3) #3 37.000
(#3 length compensation data)
The mode thus set is retained even after the screen is changed or after power has been turned OFF.
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset
I-115
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
(2) Menu selection method (#1136=1) (a) Change over to the absolute value setting mode
Set value in #( ), X( ) or Z( ), then press the = INPUT key.
[TOOL OFFSET] TOOL 2.1/2 #A : ABS. #I : INC. [POSITION] Z 0.000 SURFACE 0# = 50.000 # 1 X 120.000 11 300.000 2 X 50.000 12 50.000 3 X 100.000 13 250.000
: : : : : : T O M # ( ) DATA ( )
=INPUT +INPUT RETURN
(b) Change over to the incremental value setting mode
Set value in #( ), X( ) or Z( ), then press the + INPUT key.
[TOOL OFFSET] TOOL 2.1/2 #A : ABS. #I : INC. [POSITION] Z 0.000 SURFACE 0# = 50.000 # 1 X 120.000 11 300.000 2 X 50.000 12 50.000 3 X 100.000 13 250.000
: : : : : : T O M # ( ) DATA ( )
=INPUT +INPUT RETURN
* When the cursor is moved to X( ) or Z( ) then the data key is pressed, =INPUT,+INPUT menu will
appear automatically. (c) Supplement If INPUT key is pressed while = INPUT, + INPUT are displayed, the offset data can be set for mode
selection method. = INPUT, + INPUT are displayed until BACK menu key is pressed or other screens are selected. The screen selection menu is displayed when TOOL OFFSET screen is selected again after other
screens are selected once. Mark of the screen selection menu indicates that the operation menu exist on the screen being
displayed. The operation menu is invalid during the tool measurement with manual tool length measurement
function. The operation menu during the tool measurement operates as follows. 1) When the screen select menu is displayed + INPUT, = INPUT dont appear during the tool measurement. If = INPUT, + INPUT with mark
are pressed during the tool measurement, ERROR (E74) will occur. 2) When the operation menu is displayed If = INPUT, + INPUT are pressed during the tool measurement, ERROR (E74) will occur. = INPUT, + INPUT are invalid during the manual numerical command mode. If = INPUT, + INPUT are pressed during the manual numerical command mode, ERROR (E74) will
occur. If the screen selection menu displayed with mark is pressed during the manual numerical command mode, ERROR (E74) will occur.
When the offset memory No. not displayed on the screen is set in setting area # ( ), the screen corresponding to the offset memory No. set in will appear by pressing = INPUT,+ INPUT key of one time. The offset data will be set by pressing = INPUT, + INPUT key again.
When the tool nose point data is set on the NOSE-R screen, the absolute setting is selected whichever of = INPUT and + INPUT key is pressed.
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset
I-116
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
3.1.4 Manual Tool Length Measurement By moving a tool manually from the reference to measurement point, the travel distance from the basic to
measurement point can be measured and set as tool offset. (1) Tool length measurement I When the tool is placed in the machine coordinate zero point, the distance from the tool tip to
measurement point (workpiece top end) can be measured and set as tool offset data.
When TLM basic length (#1102 tlm) = 0 and SURFACE #0 = 0 are set, tool length measurement I mode is set.
Machine coordinate zero point
Workpiece Table
Manual travel distance (tool length offset data)
(2) Tool length measurement II When the tool is placed in the machine coordinate zero point, the distance from the reference point to
tool tip can be measured and set as tool offset data.
Manual travel distance
Machine coordinate zero point
Gauge block SURFACE #0=
Tool offset data (internal calculation value)
TL M
b as
ic le
ng th
Table
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset
I-117
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
(3) Tool offset data setting by tool length measurement
OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU
[TOOL OFFSET] TOOL 1.1/ 2 #A:ABS. #I:INC. [MACHINE] Z 0.000 SURFACE #O = 50.000
# 1 0.000 11 300.000 2 50.000 12 50.000 3 100.000 13 250.000 4 0.000 14 50.000 5 100.000 15 150.000 6 60.000 16 80.000 7 20.000 17 200.000 8 150.000 18 150.000 9 20.000 19 500.000
10 0.000 20 100.000 T 0 M #( ) DATA( )
1) Tool length measurement I
Position the tool to the machine coordinate zero point.
START
Select a measurement tool.
Set the absolute value setting mode.
Turn ON the machine operation board "TLM" switch.
Move the tool to the measurement point by making jog feed or manual handle feed.
Upon completion of measurement, specify the tool offset number.
Select the TOOL OFFSET screen. Enter
A in # ( ), then press the
INPUT key. "#A: ABS." is displayed in reverse video. To message "TLM" is displayed on the TOOL OFFSET screen. 0 is displayed in DATA ( ) field. The measurement value is displayed in DATA ( ) field in sequence. The measurement value is also displayed under [TLM]. The current value of the measurement axis is displayed under [MACHINE] Z. Set the offset number in # ( ) and press the
INPUT key. The measurement data is displayed at the position of the specified offset number.
Setting and display on the TOOL OFFSET screen
(Note) For operation procedure, see Machine Operation manual.
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset
I-118
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
2) Tool length measurement II
Position the tool to the machine coordinate zero point.
START
Select measurement tool.
To use gage block, etc., set the value of the basic height.
Turn ON the machine operation board "TLM" switch.
Move the tool to the measurement point by making jog feed or manual handle feed.
Upon completion of measurement, specify the tool offset number.
Check axis specification parameter "#2015 tlml" data of machine parameter. (Set the value of the distance from the reference point to table surface.) Set # ( 0 ) DATA ( . ) and press the
INPUT key. The data is displayed in SURFACE # 0 = . The message "TLM" is displayed on the TOOL OFFSET screen. Dummy tool length data "parameter tlml" - "#0" is displayed in the DATA ( ) field. The measurement value is displayed in the DATA ( ) field in sequence. The current value of the measurement axis is displayed under [MACHINE] Z. Set the offset number in # ( ) and press the
INPUT key. The measurement data is displayed at the position of the specified offset number.
Setting and display on the TOOL OFFSET screen
On measurement, first check the TLM basic length.
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset
I-119
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
3.1.5 Manual Numeric Command Operation on the TOOL OFFSET Screen (M, T) To execute a manual numeric command on the TOOL OFFSET screen, first change the mode from usual
data setting to manual numeric command. The M and T commands can be executed by screen operation in manual numeric command mode.
(1) Changing the mode from usual data setting to manual
numeric command In the usual data setting mode, the cursor is
displayed in the data setting field. It is not displayed in manual numeric command
mode. By checking this difference, make sure that the mode has changed. Change the mode by the following operations:
T M
#( )DATA( )
Set
M (Manual) in the first parenthesis pair of the setting field.
T M
#( M )DATA( )
1) This operation is necessary regardless of the
command (M, T).
Press the
INPUT key. The mode changes to manual numerical command.
T M
#( )DATA( )
1) Data is cleared from the setting field. The cursor is
also cleared from the screen. (2) Execution the manual numeric command ... Execute this after operation (1) above. 1) Press the address key corresponding to the command. The corresponding command value display
field is highlighted, and the manual numeric command input mode is activated. To execute the tool function, input
T . To execute the miscellaneous function, input
M . 2) Input the specified numerics from keys. 3) Press the
INPUT key. The command is executed.
(Note) The manual numeric command operation is the same as the operation for the POSITION screen. See "Manual numeric Command" in 'POSITION' of 'MONITOR' screen for details.
(3) Returning the mode from manual numeric command to usual data setting
Press the
key. The usual data setting mode returns.
T20 M6
#( )DATA( )
1) The cursor is displayed in first parenthesis pairs.
After this, usual data setting is enabled.
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.2 Tool Registration
I-120
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
3.2 Tool Registration When the menu key
REGIST is pressed, the TOOL REGISTRATION screen is displayed. The use of this screen varies depending on the user PLC. For details, refer to the appropriate manual issued by the machine maker.
3.2.1 Function Outline (1) The used tools can be registered in magazine pots. (2) When magazine pots and tool numbers are changed by the tool selection or tool replacement
command, new tool numbers are displayed. (3) Any data can be set in setting area AUX ( ) and sequence processing can be performed by using user
PLC. (4) Tools can be registered under HEAD, NEXT 1 to NEXT 3, and INDEX displayed on the screen top. The
display names and the number of display pieces can also be changed. (5) Although the number of registered tools varies depending on the specifications, a maximum of 80 tools
can be registered (the maximum number of digits of a tool number is four.) (6) Tool selection and head replacement can be made by using manual numeric commands.
OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU
[T-REGISTRATION] TOOL 2.1/2 HEAD NEXT-1 NEXT-2 NEXT-3 SEARCH 10 20 21 30 22 MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D 1 101 0 11 201 0 21 301 0 2 102 0 12 202 0 22 302 0 3 103 0 13 203 0 23 303 0 4 104 0 14 204 0 24 304 0 5 105 0 15 205 0 25 305 0 6 106 0 16 206 0 26 306 0 7 107 0 17 207 0 27 307 0 8 108 0 18 208 0 28 308 0 9 109 0 19 209 0 29 309 0 10 110 0 20 210 0 30 310 0 T 0 M MG( ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.2 Tool Registration
I-121
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
3.2.2 Tool Registration in Magazine Pot
OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU
T 0 M MG( 1 ) TOOL( 1234 ) D( 2 ) AUX( )
Set 1 in MG ( ), 1234 in TOOL ( ), and 2 in D ( ).
Press the
INPUT key. [T-REGISTRATION] TOOL 2.1/2 HEAD NEXT-1 NEXT-2 NEXT-3 SEARCH MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D 1 1234-2 11 21 2 12 22 3 13 23 4 14 24
The tool number and data in D are displayed in the specified magazine number area. The magazine number in setting area MG ( ) is incremented by one and the data in other parenthesis pairs disappears. If a number other than magazine numbers listed in the data display area is set, the screen is changed to the screen corresponding to the setup magazine number when the
INPUT key is first pressed. When the
INPUT key is pressed again, the data set in the area is displayed. (Note) For the functions and purpose of data in D, refer to the
appropriate manual issued by the machine maker.
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.2 Tool Registration
I-122
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
3.2.3 Tool Registration in HEAD, NEXT, and INDEX This function is used to change display data when the tool number set in magazine pot differs from the
displayed tool number.
Press the
INPUT key.
Set SP in MG ( ), and 8 in TOOL ( ).
Set in HEAD MG (SP) TOOL ( ) Set in NEXT 1 MG (N1) TOOL ( ) Set in NEXT 2 MG (N2) TOOL ( ) Set in NEXT 3 MG (N3) TOOL ( ) Set in INDEX MG (N4) TOOL ( )
OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU
[T-REGISTRATION] TOOL 2.1/2 HEAD NEXT-1 NEXT-2 NEXT-3 SEARCH 10 20 21 30 22 MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D 1 101 0 11 201 0 21 301 0 2 102 0 12 202 0 22 302 0 3 103 0 13 203 0 23 303 0 4 104 0 14 204 0 24 304 0 5 105 0 15 205 0 25 305 0 6 106 0 16 206 0 26 306 0 7 107 0 17 207 0 27 307 0 8 108 0 18 208 0 28 308 0 9 109 0 19 209 0 29 309 0 10 110 0 20 210 0 30 310 0 T 0 M MG( ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )
8 is displayed below HEAD in the data display area and a change is made to MG (N1) in the data setting area.
(Note) Although the title display on the screen top (HEAD,NEXT 1 to NEXT 3, INDEX) varies depending on the machine maker, data is set by using SP And N1 to N4.
3.2.4 Tool Registration Data Clear
Press the
INPUT key. All data displayed in HEAD, NEXT 1 to NEXT 3, INDEX, and MG1 to MGn is cleared.
Set CL in MG ( ).
(Note) If any other key has been pressed before the
INPUT key is pressed, the tool registration data will not be cleared.
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.2 Tool Registration
I-123
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
3.2.5 Manual numeric Command Operation on the TOOL REGISTRATION Screen (M, T) To execute a manual numeric command on the TOOL REGISTRATION screen, first change the mode from
usual data setting to manual numeric command. The M and T commands can be executed by screen operation in manual numeric command mode.
(1) Changing the mode from usual data setting to manual numeric command In the usual data setting mode, the cursor is
displayed in the data setting field. It is not displayed in manual numeric command mode. By checking this difference, make sure that the mode has changed. Change the mode by the following operations:
T M
MG( )TOOL( )D( )AUX( )
Set
M (Manual) in the first parenthesis pair of the setting field.
T M
MG( M )TOOL( )D( )AUX( )
1) This operation is necessary regardless of the
command (M, T).
Press the
INPUT key. The mode changes to manual numerical command.
T M
MG( )TOOL( )D( )AUX( )
1) Data is cleared from the setting field. The cursor is
also cleared from the screen. (2) Execution of the manual numeric command ... Execute this after operation (1) above. 1) Press the address key corresponding to the command. The corresponding command value display
field is highlighted, and the manual numeric command input mode is activated. To execute the tool function, input
T . To execute the miscellaneous function, input
M . 2) Input the specified numerics from keys. 3) Press the
INPUT key. The command is executed.
(Note) The manual numeric command operation is the same as the operation for the POSITION screen. See "2.1.3 Manual numeric Command" in 'POSITION' of 'MONITOR' screen for details.
(3) Returning the mode from manual numeric command to usual data setting
Press the
. The usual data setting mode returns.
T20 M6
MG( )TOOL( )D( )AUX( )
1) The cursor is displayed in first parenthesis pairs.
After this, usual data setting is enabled.
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.3 Tool Life
I-124
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
3.3 Tool Life When the menu key
LIFE is pressed, the TOOL LIFE screen is displayed. The TOOL LIFE screen consists of the HEAD, NEXT, GROUP LIST screen and TOOL LIFE data screen. 3.3.1 Function Outline Tool life management is configured of the following two functions.
(1) The use time or count of the tool mounted on the spindle is accumulated and the tool use state is monitored.
(2) A spare tool is selected among programmed tool commands. Tool position offset and tool diameter compensation are performed for the selected tool.
Related parameters
# Items Details Setting range (unit) 1103 T_Life Validate life
management Select the usage of the tool life management function.
0: Do not use. 1: Perform tool life
management control.
1104 T_Com2 Tool command method 2
Select the command method for when #1103 T_Life is set to 1.
0: Handle the program tool command as the group No.
1: Handle the program tool command as the tool No.
0/1
1105 T_sel2 Tool selection method 2
Select the tool selection method for when #1103 T_Life is set to 1.
0: Select in order of registered No. from the tools used in the same group.
1: Select the tool with the longest remaining life from tools used in the same group and the unused tools.
0/1
(Note) Mainly the screen operations are explained in this manual. Refer to the "PLC Programming Manual (Ladder Section)" for details on using the tool life management function.
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.3 Tool Life
I-125
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
3.3.2 TOOL LIFE Screen Data Display (1) HEAD, NEXT, GROUP LIST screen
(Display only. No data can be set).
OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU
[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.1/2 GROUP TOOL NO. ST FORM L-CMP R-CMP AUX LIFE USED
HEAD: 10000000 12345678 1 000 -345.678 100.000 12345 234 34(min)
NEXT: 80000000 87654321 0 000 45.678 30.000 12345 234 4(min)
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000
10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 70000 80000 90000
100000 200000 300000 400000 500000 600000 700000 800000 900000
1000000 2000000 3000000 4000000 5000000 6000000 7000000 8000000 9000000
100000002000000030000000 40000000 50000000 60000000 70000000 80000000 90000000
Display item Explanation HEAD NEXT
The tool numbers and TOOL LIFE data of the tools in HEAD and NEXT are displayed. When TOOL LIFE is ineffective, only the tool numbers are displayed.
GROUP LIST The group numbers registered as TOOL LIFE data are displayed. A maximum of 90 group numbers are displayed on one screen. If the number of the group numbers
exceeds 90, the screen is scrolled every line by using the
or
key.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000
10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 70000 80000 90000
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000
10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 70000 80000 90000
One-line scroll by pressing
key. OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU
OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.3 Tool Life
I-126
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
(2) TOOL LIFE data screen The TOOL LIFE data displays tool data in group units. If the number of lines displayed exceeds one
screen area, press the
NEXT PAGE or
PREVIOUS PAGE key to scroll the screen.
The data to control the life of a group of tools can be displayed and set.
[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.2/2
GROUP 10000000
# TOOL NO. ST FROM L-CMP R-CMP AUX LIFE USED
1 12345678 4 220 -345.678 100.000 12345 1234 234(min)
2 1234567 3 120 112.340 30.000 11111 123 45(min)
3 123456 2 111 122.220 20.000 44444 100 50(set)
4 12345 1 002 11.234 100.123 100 50 15(cyc)
5
6
7
8
9
10
# ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU
Display item Explanation Setting range GROUP Group number of the tools which carry out tool life
control. A tool having the same group number is handled as a spare tool.
1 to 99999999
#1 to #10 These are data setting numbers, not magazine pot numbers.
TOOL NO. Number given to each tool. A maximum of 400 tool numbers can be registered depending on the specifications. This is a number unique to the tool actually output during the tool command, etc.
1 to 99999999
ST
Tool status
Open to machine maker Tool Status 0: Unused tool. Normally, it is set to 0 when the tool is replaced
with a new tool. 1: Used tool. It is set to 1 when actual cutting is begun. 2: Normal life tool. It is set to 2 when the use data (time, count)
exceeds the life data. 3: Tool error 1 tool 4: Tool error 2 tool
(Note) 3 and 4 depend on the machine maker specifications.
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.3 Tool Life
I-127
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
Display item Explanation Setting range
FORM
Tool life control mode
Tool diameter compensation data
Tool length offset data format (a) Tool life control mode 0: Use time Controlled by the time during which cutting feed
is performed. 1: Mount count Controlled by the number of times the tool is
used as a spindle tool. Note that if cutting feed (G01, G02, G03, etc.) is not commanded even once after the tool is set as the spindle tool, the mounting will not be counted.
2: Work count Work count The work count is made whenever a rapid
traverse feed (G00, etc.) command is replaced by a cutting feed command (G01, G02, G03, etc.). However, rapid traverse feed or cutting feed commands inducing no movement are ignored.
G00 G01 G04G00 G00 G01 G04 G01
Cutting feed
Increment by 1
Cutting feed
Increment by 1 (b) Tool diameter compensation data format 0: Compensation number Compensation data in tool data is handled as
compensation number. It is replaced with the compensation number commanded in a work program for compensation.
1: Addition compensation amount Compensation data in tool data is handled as
addition compensation amount. It is added to the compensation amount indicated by the compensation number commanded in a work program for compensation.
2: Direct compensation amount Compensation data in tool data is handled as
direct compensation amount. It is replaced with the compensation amount indicated by the compensation number commanded in a work program for compensation.
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.3 Tool Life
I-128
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
Display item Explanation Setting range
FORM (c) Tool length offset data format 0: Offset number 1: Addition offset amount 2: Direct offset amount The functions are the same as in (b) above.
L-CMP R-CMP
These depend on the data format specified in "FORM". Compensation number 1 to 400 Addition compensation amount 1 to 99999.999 Direct compensation amount 1 to 99999.999
AUX This depends on the machine maker specifications. 0 to 65535 LIFE Life of each tool. It is displayed in the use time
(minutes), mount count (the number of times the tool has been mounted on the spindle), or work count (the number of times hole drilling has been performed) as specified in "FORM". If it is set to 0, life infinity is specified.
Use time 0 to 4000 (min) Mount count 0 to 9999/65000 (times) Work count 0 to 9999/65000 (times)
USE Use data of each tool is displayed in the form as specified in FORM (a. Tool life control mode). (Note) Use data is not counted during machine lock, miscellaneous function lock, dry run, or single block mode.
Use time 0 to 4000 (min) Mount count 0 to 9999/65000 (times) Work count 0 to 9999/65000 (times)
(Note) The No. of uses/No. of mounts depends on the model.
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.3 Tool Life
I-129
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
3.3.3 TOOL LIFE Data Display and Setting (TOOL LIFE Data Screen Page 2) (1) Data display When the menu key
NEXT PAGE is pressed on the HEAD, NEXT, GROUP list screen (previously described),
the TOOL LIFE screen is displayed. The data in the group previously set is displayed. If no data is set, the screen is displayed with blank in
the data area.
Press the
INPUT key.
Set G123 in # ( ).
[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.2/2
GROUP 123
# TOOL NO. ST FROM L-CMP R-CMP AUX LIFE USED
1 12345678 4 220 -345.678 100.000 12345 1234 234(min)
2 1234567 3 120 112.340 30.000 11111 123 45(min)
3 123456 2 111 122.220 20.000 44444 100 50(set)
4 12345 1 002 11.234 100.123 100 50 15(cyc)
5
6
7
8
9
10
# ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU
Set necessary data of TOOL NO. to USED in the corresponding parenthesis pairs in the ascending order of the (#) numbers, then press the
INPUT key.
Set G in # ( ), then press the
INPUT key.
(2) Data registration Select TOOL LIFE data screen for the group in which data is to be registered.
OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU
[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.2/2
GROUP 123
# TOOL NO. ST FROM L-CMP R-CMP AUX LIFE USED
1 12345678 4 220 -345.678 100.000 12345 1234 234(min)
2 1234567 3 120 112.340 30.000 11111 123 45(min)
3 123456 2 111 122.220 20.000 44444 100 50(set)
4 12345 1 002 11.234 100.123 100 50 15(cyc)
5
6
7
8
9
10
# ( 5) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
The data is registered, and a setting number incremented by one is set in #().
(Note 1) If TOOL NO. and ST (status) are not set, setup data becomes invalid. (Note 2) A single tool cannot be registered in more than one group.
The tool data registered in group 123 is displayed in the registration order. If the data exceeds one screen, the remaining data can be seen by using the
NEXT PAGE key.
3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.3 Tool Life
I-130
Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.
Set 11 in # ( ), then press the
INPUT key.
To register data exceeding the number of data pieces that can be displayed on a screen, set the # number only. New data can be registered.
OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU
7 12345678 4 220 -345.678 100.000 12345 1234 234(min)
8 1234567 3 120 112.340 30.000 11111 123 45(min)
9 123456 2 111 122.220 20.000 44444 100 50(set)
10 12345 1 002 11.234 100.123 100 50 15(cyc)
# ( 11) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.2/2
GROUP 123
# TOOL NO. ST FROM L-CMP R-CMP AUX LIFE USED
11
12
13
14
(3) Data change 1) Display the TOOL LIFE data screen for the group in which the tool whose data is to be changed is
registered. 2) Set the # number of the data to be changed and new data in given parenthesis pairs of the setting
area, then press the
INPUT key. 3) After setting, the # number is incremented by one and is set in setting area ( ). 4) To change data under # number not displayed on the screen, change the screen by using the
NEXT PAGE or
PREVIOUS PAGE key or setting the number in setting area # ( ).
5) By changing a registered tool number to 0, the tool can be deleted. (4) Deletion in group units To delete all data in one group, select the TOOL LIFE data screen for the group to be deleted and press
the
SHIFT key,
C.B CAN key, then
INPUT key.
(Note) If any other key has been pressed before the
INPUT key is pressed, the TOOL LIFE data will not be deleted.
3.3.4 Clear of All TOOL LIFE Data (HEAD, NEXT, GROUP LIST Screen Page 1) To clear all data, select the HEAD, NEXT, GROUP LIST screen and press
SHIFT key,
C.B CAN key, then
INPUT key.
(Note) If any other key has been pressed before the
INPUT key is pressed, the TOOL LIFE data will not be cleared.
4. Parameters (User)
I-131
4. Parameters (User) When the function selection key
TOOL
PARAM is pressed, the following menu appears: TOOL menu is displayed after the power is turned ON. To display PARAM menu, use menu key
MENU on the TOOL screen.
WEAR DATA
#1 to #10
TOOL LENGTH
DATA #1 to #10
TOOLNOSE DATA
#1 to #10
TOOL LIFE DATA
#1 to #10
# to #
# to #
# to #
# to #
WORK PROCESS I/O BASE
PARAM
SETUP
PARAMETER
CONTROL
AXIS
BARRIER PARAM
PARAM
PARAM
PARAM
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
Menu selection keysPrevious page key Next page key
TOOL menu display (No.1 to 4) PARAM menu display (No.1 to 4)
WEAR DATA
TOOL LENGTH DATA
TOOL NOSE DATA
TOOL LIFE DATA MENU
PARAM menu (No.1 to 4)
[L system] TOOL menu (No.1 to 4)
[M system] TOOL menu (No.1 to 4)
MG61 to MG80
MG41 to MG60
MG21 to MG40
T- REGISTRATION
MG1 to MG20
# to #
#21 to #40 or #11 to #20
TOOL OFFSET #1 to #20
or #1 to #10
TOOL DATA
TOOL LIFE
CHOSEN TOOL GROUP LIST
TOOL DATA
Refer to TOOL OFFSET
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
MENU
BACKUP
4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate
I-132
4.1 Workpiece Coordinate Pressing the menu key
WORK displays the WORK OFFSET screen. The workpiece coordinate system offset data can be set or displayed for the number of axes. [WORK OFFSET] TOOL 5. 1/1
#A: ABS. #I: INC.
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
[When workpiece position measurement specifications are added (M system)]
[WORK OFFSET] TOOL 5. 1/18 #A:ABS. #I:INC.
#1 TLM P.A 0.000 0.000 #2 TLM P.B 0.000 0.000 #3 TLM P.C 0.000 0.000 WLM #( 1) DATA ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) LSK mm INC G40 G54 MEMORY
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate
I-133
# Parameter Explanation Setting range (units)
54 55 56 57 58 59 60 101 : 148
G54 offset G55 offset G56 offset G57 offset G58 offset G59 offset EXT offset P1 : P48
Specify the workpiece coordinate system and external workpiece coordinate offset from G54 to G59, and P1 to P48. Workpiece coordinate system offset data can be specified in absolute or incremental values.
M
R
W2
Basic machine coordinate system
G55 workpiece coordinate system
Reference point
External (EXT) offset
G54 workpiece coordinate system
W1
(Note) P1 to P48 are options.
99999.999 (mm)
#1 TLM P.A (M system)
The coordinate value of the measured position (X, Y) of the first point of he hole center workpiece offset Measurement or the width center workpiece offset Measurement is set. Then TLM P.A is highlighted. If the measurements switch ON or workpiece coordinate is set, the coordinates value of measured position is cleared to 0.
#2 TLM P.B (M system)
The coordinate value of the measured position (X, Y) of the first point of he hole center workpiece offset Measurement or the width center workpiece offset Measurement is set. Then TLM P.B is highlighted. If the measurements switch ON or workpiece coordinate is set, the coordinates value of measured position is cleared to 0.
#3 TLM P.C (M system)
The coordinate value of the measured position (X, Y) of the first point of he hole center workpiece offset Measurement or the width center workpiece offset Measurement is set. Then TLM P.C is highlighted. If the measurements switch ON or workpiece coordinate is set, the coordinates value of measured position is cleared to 0.
4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate
I-134
Display item Explanation
#A: ABS. #I : INC.
The currently effective one of the setting modes (absolute and incremental) is displayed in reverse video. Before setting data, check the mode.
4.1.1 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System Offset Data (1) Enter the number corresponding to the workpiece coordinate system in # ( ), put offset data in DATA
( ), then press the
INPUT key. This defines workpiece coordinate system offset data. (2) The workpiece coordinate system offset data thus defined is then displayed at the position of the
workpiece coordinate system and the number in # ( ) changes to the next setting number and the data in DATA ( ) disappears.
(3) The number displayed in # ( ) is incremented and decremented by pressing the arrow keys
. (4) Typing
in # ( ) and pressing the
INPUT key puts the setting mode to the incremental mode. Data entered in the incremental mode is added to the data in the setting field.
Typing
A in # ( ) and pressing the
INPUT key cancels the incremental mode and restores the absolute mode.
4.1.2 Setting External Workpiece Coordinate System Offset Data By measuring the coordinate system deviation with an external touch sensor, etc., all workpiece coordinate
systems G54 to G59 can be offset. External workpiece coordinate system data can be defined in one of two ways: inputting external data
directly to the external offset (EXT) or entering it into the setting field on the screen (EXT). The setting method is the same as for workpiece coordinate system offset data. 4.1.3 Displaying Machine Position Data As with the POSITION screen, data of each axis displayed at the [MACHINE] on the WORK OFFSET
screen indicates the current machine position in reference to the zero point on the basic machine coordinate system; it cannot be changed on this screen.
4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate
I-135
4.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement Function (L System) (1) Outline The workpiece coordinate offset data is automatically calculated when the tool nose is aligned to the
workpiece coordinate zero point and the
INPUT
SHIFT keys (
CALC key) are pressed. The calculation results are displayed in the setting area on the screen.
(2) Operation procedures
Start
(a) Returning to zero point
Confirmation of tool length and nose wear
(b) Selecting the tool
(c) Positioning the tool nose
Shift to WORK OFFSET screen
(d) Selecting the measurement workpiece coordinate and axis
(e) Automatically calculating the workpiece coordinate system's offset data
Error?
(f) Setting the data
Continue measurement?
End
No
Yes
Yes
No
No option
Setting error
Measurement axis R point incomplete
Compensation number illegal
Data range exceeded
Steps for measuring workpiece coordinate offset (L system)
4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate
I-136
(a) Returning to zero point After turning the power ON, establish the coordinate system with the dog-type zero point return. If the absolute position is not established when using the absolute position detection specifications,
carry out initialization first. (Note) This is not required if the axis to be measured is an axis with no zero point ("#2031 noref"
= 1). (b) Selecting the tool Execute the T command with the "manual numeric command" on the "POSITION" screen or with
the MDI operation, select the tool. (Note 1) Set the offset number of the selected tool in the R register. (When setting from the user PLC, set as a BCD code.) (Note 2) Preset the "tool length/wear data" for the tool to be used.
(c) Positioning the tool nose Using JOG or the handle, move the nose of the axis to be measured above the workpiece coordinate
system zero point. The workpiece coordinate system offset data is measured one axis at a time.
1) 1st axis (X axis) workpiece coordinate offset measurement
Workpiece
Machine zero point
Turret
Workpiece coordinate system zero point
Z
2) 2nd axis (Z axis) workpiece coordinate offset measurement
Workpiece
Machine zero point Turret
Workpiece coordinate system zero point
Z
X
X
4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate
I-137
(d) Selecting the measurement workpiece coordinate and axis Set the workpiece coordinates to be measured in the # ( ) setting area, and then move the cursor
to the setting area of the axis to be measured. (Example) To measure the X axis (1st axis) of the G55 workpiece coordinate system.
Set 55 in # ( ). 1)
WORK
#(55) DATA ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
Move the cursor to the X axis setting area.
2)
WORK
#(55) DATA ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
(e) Automatically calculating the workpiece coordinate system offset data When the
INPUT
SHIFT keys are pressed, the selected axis' workpiece coordinate offset data will be automatically calculated from the machine value, tool length data and tool nose wear data. The calculation results will be displayed in the setting area.
The setting mode (absolute value setting/increment value setting) will automatically be set to the absolute value setting.
(Example) To calculate X axis (1st axis) in G55 workpiece coordinate system (Step after (d) Selecting the measurement workpiece coordinate and axis.)
Press the
INPUT
SHIFT keys. 3)
WORK
#(55) DATA ( 9.889)( )( )( )
The automatically calculated workpiece coordinate offset data will be displayed at the cursor position (X axis).
1) Details of automatic calculation expression The workpiece coordinate offset data is calculated with the following expression. Workpiece coordinate offset data = machine value (tool length data + tool nose wear data)
Workpiece coordinate offset data (1st axis)
Machine value (1st axis) Machine zero point
Turret
Workpiece coordinate system zero point
Tool length (2nd axis) + tool nose wear offset amount (2nd axis)
Tool length (1st axis) + tool nose wear offset amount (1st axis)
Workpiece coordinate offset data (2nd axis)
Machine value (2nd axis)
4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate
I-138
2) Offset number for selected tool The number set in the following R register is used as the offset number of the tool length and tool
nose wear data used for the automatic calculation.
#1098 TLno.
#1130 set_t
#1218 aux02 /bit4
Tool length offset number
Tool nose wear offset number
0 0/1 0/1 $1: R192,R193 $2: R392,R393
0 $1: R36,R37 $2: R236,R237 0
1 1
1 0/1 $1: R194,R195 $2: R394,R395
$1: R192,R193 $2: R392,R393
(Note 1) The offset amount will be calculated as "0" when the offset number is 0. (Note 2) If the offset number exceeds the specified number of offset sets, the error "#76 TOOL
No. ERROR" will occur. (Note 3) The tool nose wear offset amount will be calculated as "0" when "#1226 aux10/
bit0" is set to 1.
3) Calculating the workpiece coordinate offset data for an additional axis The workpiece coordinate offset data for the 5th to 8th axes is calculated with the tool length
data/tool nose wear data set to "0". As a result, the value will be the same as the machine value. The workpiece coordinate offset data for the 3rd and 4th axes follows the value set in "#1520
Tchg34".
#1520 Tchg34
Workpiece coordinate offset data for 3rd axis
Workpiece coordinate offset data for 4th axis
0 Calculated using the machine value, tool length and wear offset data.
Same as 4th axis' machine value.
1 Same as 3rd axis' machine value. Calculated using the machine value, tool length and wear offset data.
(f) Setting the data If the calculation results displayed in the setting area are correct, press the
INPUT key and set the data.
(Example) To set the G55 workpiece coordinate system's X axis (1st axis) (Step after (e) Automatically calculating the workpiece coordinate system offset data)
Press the
INPUT key. 4)
WORK
54 G54 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 55 G55 9.889 0.000 0.000 0.000
The data is set in G55 X axis.
(3) Precautions
(a) If data is set at the cursor position, it will be overwritten with the calculated value when the
INPUT
SHIFT keys are pressed.
(b) This data cannot be set while the program is running.
4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate
I-139
4.1.5 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement Function (M System) (1) Outline
The current machine position is displayed in the setting area when the
INPUT
SHIFT keys (
CALC key) are pressed.
(2) Operation procedures
(Example) To measure the X axis (1st axis) of the G54 workpiece coordinate system.
Set 54 in # ( ). 1)
WORK
#(54) DATA ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
Move the cursor to the X axis setting area.
2)
WORK
#(54) DATA ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
Press the
INPUT
SHIFT keys. 3)
WORK
#(54) DATA ( 3.987)( )( )( )
The machine position is displayed at the cursor position (X axis).
Press the
INPUT key. 4)
WORK
54 G54 3.987 0.000 0.000 0.000 55 G55 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
The data is set in G54 X axis.
(3) Precautions
(a) The workpiece coordinate offset measurement function will not activate while the tool measurement mode signal is ON (while the TLM switch is ON.) (The
INPUT
SHIFT keys will be ignored.)
(b) If data is set at the cursor position, it will be overwritten with the calculated value when the
INPUT
SHIFT keys are pressed.
(c) This data cannot be set while the program is running.
4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate
I-140
4.1.6 Workpiece position Measurement Function (M System) The workpiece position measurement function is used to measure each axis coordinate point by the sensor
installed on the spindle contacting the workpiece with the manual feed or handle feed. The surface, hole center and width center coordinates are calculated from the measured coordinates, and
those calculated results are set in the workpiece coordinate offset. Only 1st part system is available for the workpiece position measurement. (1) Surface workpiece offset measurement procedure
Perform an operation such as a reference point return to position the tool on the reference point.
1)
Turn ON the measurement switch on the machine operation board.
2) The message " WLM " appears.
Move the sensor near the workpiece using manual feed and manual handle feed.
3)
Put the sensor in contact with the workpiece in the X-axis direction.
4) X
Automatic re-contact movements are performed by the axis at the time of contact. The measurement coordinate value of the moved axis is displayed to the setting column. #( )( 123.456 )( )( )
Set the setting number of workpiece coordinate system, then press the INPUT key. #( 54 )( 123.456 )( )( )
5) The value that subtracted external workpiece offset value from the measurement value is set to the X-axis specified workpiece coordinate system offset. The setting column will change to blanks.
Carry out the operations in steps 3) to 5) in the same way for the Y-axis and Z-axis.
6)
4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate
I-141
Return the sensor to the reference point, and turn OFF the measurement switch.
7) The message " WLM " disappears.
(2) Hole center workpiece offset measurement procedure
Perform an operation such as a reference point return to position the tool on the reference point.
1)
Turn ON the measurement switch on the machine operation board.
2) The message " WLM " appears.
Move the sensor into the hole using manual feed and manual handle feed.
3)
Put the sensor in contact with the inner walls of the hole. Only one axis performs contact to the workpiece.
4)
Automatic re-contact movements are performed by the axis that did contact. The measurement coordinate value of the moved axis is displayed to the setting column. #( )( 123.45 )( )( )
Set the contact position data (measurement coordinate) as point A. #( 1) INPUT
5) The measurement coordinate value is set to point A (X, Y). The setting column is updated to #( 2). The measurement A and data of movement axis are highlighted. The setting column will change to blanks. #1 TLM P. A 12.345 45.678
4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate
I-142
Measure points B and C in the same way, and set them.
6)
(Note) Width center workpiece offset measurement is performed when only points A and B are set. Perform the measurement by one axis.
Point A Point B
Point C
Set the setting number of workpiece coordinate system, then press the INPUT key. #( 54 )( )( )( )
7) The hole center is calculated from points A, B and C. The value that subtracted external workpiece offset value from the calculated hole center value is set. The setting column highlight returns to normal and the value is cleared to 0.
Return the sensor to the reference point, and turn OFF the measurement switch.
8) The message " WLM " disappears.
(3) Width center workpiece offset measurement procedure
Perform an operation such as a reference point return to position the tool on the reference point.
1)
Turn ON the measurement switch on the machine operation board.
2) The message " WLM " appears.
Move the sensor into the groove using manual feed and manual handle feed.
3)
4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate
I-143
Put the sensor in contact with the inner walls of the groove. Only one axis performs contact to the workpiece.
4)
Automatic re-contact movements are performed by the axis at the time of contact. The measurement coordinate value of the moved axis is displayed to the setting column. #( )( 10.567 )( )( )
Set the contact position data (measurement coordinate) as point A.
5) The measurement coordinate value is set to #1 point A (X, Y). The setting column is updated to #( 2). TLM P. A and data of movement axis are highlighted. The setting column will change to blanks. #1 TLM P. A 10.567 5.678
Put the sensor in contact with the opposite side of the groove.
6)
Point A
Set the contact position data (measurement coordinate) as point B.
7) The measurement coordinate value is set to #2 point B (X, Y). TLM P. B and data of movement axis are highlighted.
(Note) Hole center workpiece offset measurement is performed when point C is set to data.
Set the setting number of workpiece coordinate system, then press the INPUT key. #( 54 )( )( )( )
8) The width center is calculated from points A and B. The value that subtracted external workpiece offset value from the calculated width center value is set. The setting column highlight returns to normal and the value is cleared to 0.
4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate
I-144
Return the sensor to the reference point, and turn OFF the measurement switch.
9) The message " WLM " disappears.
(4) Subtracting external workpiece offset when workpiece coordinate offset is set
When workpiece coordinate G54 to G59, offset of expend workpiece coordinate offset P101 to P148 are set ([INPUT]) in the surface, hole center and width center workpiece offset measurement, the coordinate value that subtracted external workpiece offset value from the measurement position coordinate (or hole, width center coordinate) is set.
When External workpiece offset (#1237 set09/bit0) is OFF The workpiece coordinate offset = The measurement (center) coordinate value - The external workpiece offset When External work offset (#1237 set09/bit0) is ON The workpiece coordinate offset = The measurement (center) coordinate value + The external workpiece offset
(5) Automatic re-contact movements at the time of contact
When the measurement is performed during jog mode or handle mode, perform following operation after contact.
Move to the measurement point in jog mode.
1)
Stop on the measurement point. 2)
skip
Return by the return amount of measurement parameter (#8705).
3) Return amount
Move to the measurement point again by feed rate of measurement parameter (#8706).
4)
Stop on the measurement point. (Readout of skip coordinates)
5) skip
4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate
I-145
Return by the return amount of measurement parameter (#8705).
6) Return amount
Complete the measurement. Next measurement can be performed.
7)
The speed for returning of 3), 6) are 40 times higher than the feed rate of measurement parameter (#8706). However, when the speed for returning is higher than rapid traverse feed rate (override 100%), the rapid traverse feed rate of parameter (override 100%) will be applied.
(6) Restrictions a) Measurement points A, B and C are unhighlighted and reset to 0 (not set) when the measurement
switch is turned ON/OFF, setting to the workpiece coordinate offset ends, and when the reset key is pressed.
b) Only 1st system axes can be used as measurement target axes. The measurement target axis corresponds to base-axis (#1026 base_I, #1027 base_J, #1028 base_K).
c) An error will not occur during the measurement, even if there is the axis movement other than that of the base-axis.
d) The skip machine position and measurement points A, B and C are held even when the screen changes during measurement.
e) An axis other than the measurement axis cannot be moved during the automatic re-contact movement.
f) When the return amount of measurement parameter or feed rate is 0, first contact point is measurement point, so automatic re-contact movement is not performed.
g) Perform the measurement during the movement by moving only one axis. h) The settings of the workpiece coordinate offset of surface, hole center and width center measurement
during measurement are set in absolute value mode. i) If rotary axis is set to measurement axis, the hole center / width center cannot be calculated properly by
the angle of the rotation axis.
4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters
I-146
4.2 Machining Parameters Pressing the menu key
PROCESS displays the PROCESS PARAMERTER screen. The number of digits in the decimal section of the parameters related to length is determined by the input
setting unit. The input setting unit is set with parameter "#1003 iunit".
Input setting unit No. of digits in decimal section Example of setting range B 3 0 to 999.999 (mm) C 4 0 to 99.9999 (mm) D 5 0 to 9.99999 (mm)
The setting ranges indicated in this manual use the input setting unit "B". 4.2.1 PROCESS PARAMERTER [PROCESS PARAMETER] PARAM 1.1/8
# -
8001 WRK COUNT M 0 8007 OVERRIDE 0 8012 G73 n 0.000
8002 WRK COUNT 0 8008 MAX ANGLE 0 8013 G83 n 0.000
8003 WRK LIMIT 0 8009 DSC.ZONE 0.000 8014 CDZ-VALE 0
8015 CDZ-ANGLE 0
8016 G71 MINIMUM 0.000
# -
8004 SPEED 0 8010 ABS.MAX. 0.000 8018 G84/G74n 0.000
8005 ZONE r 0.000 8011 INC.MAX. 0.000
8006 ZONE d 0.000
# ( )DATA ( )
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
8001 WRK COUNT M Set the M code that counts the No. of workpiece repeated machining. The No. will not be counted when set to 0.
0 to 99
8002 WRK COUNT The current machining No. is displayed. Set the initial value.
0 to 999999
8003 WRK LIMIT Set the maximum No. of workpieces machined. A signal is output to PLC when the No. of machining times is counted to this limit.
0 to 999999
# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8004 SPEED Set the feedrate during automatic tool length
measurement. 1 to 60000 (mm/min)
8005 ZONE r Set the distance between the measurement position and deceleration start point.
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
8006 ZONE d Set the tolerable zone of the measurement position. If the sensor signal turns ON in front of d before the measurement position or if the signal does not turn ON after d is passed an alarm will occur.
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters
I-147
8007 OVERRIDE Set the override value for automatic corner override. 0 to 100 (%) 8008 MAX ANGLE Set the max. corner opening angle where
deceleration should start automatically. If the angle is larger than this value deceleration will not start.
0 to 180 ()
8009 DSC. ZONE Set the position where deceleration starts at the corner. Designate at which length point before the corner deceleration should start.
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8010 ABS. MAX.
(For L system only) Set the max. value when inputting the tool wear compensation amount. A value exceeding this setting value cannot be set.
0 to 999.999 (mm)
8011 INC. MAX. (For L system only)
Set the max. value for when inputting the tool wear compensation amount in the addition mode.
0 to 999.999 (mm)
# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8012 G73 n
(For M system only) Set the return amount for G73 (step cycle). 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
8013 G83 n Set the return amount for G83 (deep hole drilling cycle).
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
8014 CDZ-VALE (For L system only)
Set the screw cut up amount for G76 G78 (thread cutting cycle).
0 to 127 (0.1 lead)
8015 CDZ-ANGLE (For L system only)
Set the screw cut up angle for G76 G78 (thread cutting cycle).
0 to 89 ()
8016 G71 MINIMUM (For L system only)
Set the minimum cut amount for the final cutting in G71 G72 (rough cutting cycle). If the final cutting amount is smaller than this value the final cut will not be performed.
0 to 999.999 (mm)
8017 DELTA-D (For L system only)
Set the change amount to the command cut amount D for G71 G72 (rough cutting cycle). Each cut amount will be the value obtained by adding or subtracting this value from command D and thus the amount can be changed each cut.
0 to 999.999 (mm)
8018 G84/G74 return (For M system only)
Set up return length m at a G84/G74 pecking tap cycle. Note: Set 0 to specify a usual tap cycle.
0 to 999.999 (mm)
4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters
I-148
8019 R COMP Set up a compensation factor for reducing a control error in the reduction of a corner roundness and arch radius. Indicates a maximum control error (mm) in parentheses. The larger the setup value, the smaller the theoretical error will be. However, since the speed at the corner goes down, the cycle time is extended. Coefficient = 100 setting value Note: This is valid when #8021 COMP CHANGE
is set to 0.
0 to 99 (%)
8020 DCC ANGLE Set up the minimum value of an angle (external angle) that should be assumed to be a corner. When an inter-block angle (external angle) in high-precision mode is larger than the set value, it is determined as a corner and the speed goes down to sharpen the edge.
If the set value is smaller than , the speed goes down to optimize the corner.
Note: If 0 is set, it will be handled as 5 degrees.
The standard setting value is 0.
0 to 89 (degrees) 0: The angle will be
5.
8021 COMP CHANGE Select whether to share or separate the compensation coefficient at the corner/curve during the high-accuracy control mode. 0: Share (#8019 R COMP) 1: Separate Corner (#8022 CORNER COMP) Curve (#8023 CURVE COMP) Note: Set "1" when using SSS control.
0/1
8022 CORNER COMP Set the compensation coefficient to further reduce or increase the roundness at the corner during the high-accuracy control mode. Coefficient = 100 setting value Note: This is valid when #8021 COMP CHANGE
is set to 1.
1000 to 99 (%)
8023 CURVE COMP Set the compensation coefficient to further reduce or increase the radius reduction amount at the curve (arc, involute, spline) during the high-accuracy control mode. Coefficient = 100 setting value Note: This is valid when #8021 COMP CHANGE
is set to 1.
1000 to 99 (%)
8024 EDGE ANGLE Not used.
4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters
I-149
8025 SPLINE ON (for M system only)
Specify whether to enable the fine spline function. 0: Disable the fine spline function. 1: Enable the fine spline function.
0/1
8026 CANCEL ANG. (for M system only)
When the angle made by blocks exceeds the set value, spline interpolation is canceled temporarily. In consideration of the pick feed, set a value a little smaller than the pick feed angle.
0 to 180 0: 180
8027 Toler-1 (for M system only)
Specify the maximum chord error in a block that includes an inflection point. Set the tolerance applicable when the applicable block is developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally about 10 m) When 0.000 is set, the applicable block is linear.
At 1m 0.000 to 100.000mm At 0.1m 0.0000 to
10.0000mm 8028 Toler-2
(for M system only) Specify the maximum chord error in a block that includes no inflection point. Set the tolerance applicable when the applicable block is developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally about 10 m) When 0.000 is set, the applicable block is linear.
At 1m 0.000 to 100.000mm At 0.1m 0.0000 to
10.0000mm 8029 FairingL
(for M system only) Set the length of the block subject to fairing. (Valid when #8033 Fairing ON is set to 1.)
0 to 100.000mm
8030 MINUTE LENGTH (for M system only)
When the length of one block exceeds the set value, spline interpolation is canceled temporarily and linear interpolation is performed. Set a value a little smaller than linear block length of the workpiece to be machined. If - 1 is set, spline interpolation is performed regardless of block length.
1 to 127mm 0: 1mm
8033 Fairing ON (for M system only)
Set whether to use the fairing function. 0: Fairing invalid 1: Fairing valid
0/1
8034 AccClamp ON (for M system only)
Set the method for clamping the cutting speed. 0: Clamp with parameter #2002 clamp or the
corner deceleration function. 1: Clamp the cutting speed with acceleration
judgment. (Valid when #8033 Fairing ON is set to 1.)
0/1
8035 AccClampMag Not used. 8036 CordecJudge
(for M system only) Change the conditions for judging a corner. 0: Judge the corner from the angle of the
neighboring block. 1: Judge the corner from the angle of the
neighboring block, excluding minute blocks. (Valid when #8033 Fairing ON is set to 1.)
0/1
8037 CorJudgeL (for M system only)
Set the length of the block to be excluded. (Valid when #8036 CordecJudge is set to 1.)
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters
I-150
# Item Contents Setup range (unit)
8041 C-rot.R This is valid with normal line control type II. Set the length from the center of the normal line control axis to the end of the tool. This is used to calculate the turning speed at the block joint.
0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)
8042 C-ins.R This is valid with normal line control type I. Set the radius of the arc to be automatically inserted into the corner during normal line control.
0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)
# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8051 G71 THICK Set the amount of cut-in by the rough cutting cycle
(G71, G72) 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
8052 PULL UP Set the amount of recess after cutting by the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72).
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
8053 G73 U Set the X-axis cutting margin of the forming rough cutting cycle (G73).
99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
8054 W Set the Z-axis cutting margin of the forming rough cutting cycle (G73).
99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
8055 R Set the number of times cutting is performed by the forming rough cutting cycle (G73).
0 to 99999 (times)
8056 G74 RETRACT Set the amount of retract (amount of cut-up) of the push-cut cycle (G74, G75).
0 to 999.999 (mm)
8057 G76 LAST-D Set the amount of final cut-in by the composite threading cycle (G76).
0 to 999.999 (mm)
8058 TIMES Set the number of times the amount of final cut-in (G76 finish margin) is divided in the composite threading cycle (G76).
0 to 99 (times)
8059 ANGLE Set the angle (thread angle) of the tool nose in the composite threading cycle (G76).
0 to 99 ()
# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8071 3-D CMP
(for M system only) Value of p in the following denominator constants for three-dimensional tool radius compensation Vx = i x r/p, Vy = j x r/p, Vz = k x r/p Vx, Vy, Vz: X, Y, and Z axes or vectors of horizontal axes i, j, k: Program command value r: Offset
p = 222 kji ++ when the set value is 0.
0 to 99999.999
4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters
I-151
# Item Contents Setup range (unit)
8072 SCALING P (for M system only)
Set the scale factor for reduction or magnification for the machining program for which the G50 or G51 command is issued. This parameter is effective when the program specifies no scale factor.
0 to 99.999999
# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8073 OfsetPosition
(for M system only) Set the tool offset memory number position for writing the tool information data's tool length offset amount, tool radius compensation amount, tool length wear amount and tool radius wear amount into the tool offset data. Note: If 0 or a value exceeding the number of tool
compensation sets is set, the data will not be written into the tool offset data.
0 to 999
8074 IDMacroTop (for M system only)
Set the head position when writing the tool information data's user areas 4 to 9 in the macro variables.
0 to 999
# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8075 SpiralEndErr
(for M system only) Designate the tolerable error range (absolute value) when the end point position commanded with the command format type 2 spiral interpolation or conical interpolation command differs from the end point position obtained from the speed and increment/ decrement amount.
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
8076 SpiralMinRad (for M system only)
Not used.
# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8077 InvoluteErr
(for M system only) Set the tolerable error value of the involute curve that passes through the start point and the involute curve that passes through the end point during involute interpolation.
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8078 Screen Saver Set the time to turn the screen OFF.
The screen saver will not turn ON if 0 is set. (Note) This parameter setting is valid only for the
LCD display unit.
0 to 60 (min) 0: Do not turn screen
OFF.
4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters
I-152
# Item Contents Setup range (unit)
8083 G83S modeM (for M system only)
Set the M command code for changing to the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle mode.
1 to 99999999
8084 G83S Clearanse (for M system only)
Set the clearance amount for the G83 small diameter deep hole drilling cycle.
0 to 999.999 (mm)
8085 G83S Forward F (for M system only)
Set the feedrate from the R point to the cutting start position in the G83 small diameter deep hole drilling cycle.
0 to 99999 (mm/min)
8086 G83S Back F (for M system only)
Set the speed for returning from the hole base during the G83 small diameter deep hole drilling cycle.
0 to 99999 (mm/min)
# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8090 SSS ON
(for M system only) Set whether to validate SSS control with G05 P10000.
0: Invalid 1: Valid
0/1
8091 StdLength (for M system only)
Adjust the maximum value of the range for recognizing the shape. To eliminate the effect of steps or errors, etc., set a large value. To enable sufficient deceleration, set a small value. If "0.000" is set, the standard value (1.000mm) will be applied.
0 to 100.000 (mm)
8092 ClampCoeff (for M system only)
Adjust the clamp speed at the curved section configured of fine segments.
Coefficient = setting value
1 to 100
8093 StepLeng (for M system only)
Set the width of the step at which the speed is not to be decelerated. (Approximately the same as the CAM path difference [Tolerance].) If 0 is set, the standard value (5m) will be applied. If a minus value is set, the speed will decelerate at all minute steps.
-0.001 to 0.100 (mm)
8094 DccWaitAdd (for M system only)
Set the time to wait for deceleration when the speed FB does not drop to the clamp speed.
0 to 100 (ms)
8095 Tolerance (for M system only)
Set the tolerable error when the error between the command path and tool path is large. The error will decrease when a small value is set, but the machining time will increase. If "0.000" is set, the error will not be adjusted.
0 to 100.000 (mm)
4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters
I-153
4.2.2 Control Parameters [CONTROL PARAMETER] PARAM 1.5/8
# # 8101 MACRO SINGLE 0 8113 MillingInitG16 8102 COLL. ALM OFF 0 8114 MillingInitG19 8103 COLL. CHK OFF 0 8115 8104 8116 8105 EDIT LOCK B 0 8117 8106 G46 NO REV-ERR 0 8118 8107 R COMPENSATION 0 8119 8108 R COMP Select 0 8120 8109 HOST LINK 0 8121 8110 G71/G72 POCKET 0 8122 8111 Milling Radius 0 8123 8112 DECIMAL PNT-P 0 8124 # ( ) DATA( )
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8101 MACRO SINGLE Select the control of the blocks where the user
macro command continues. 0: Do not stop while macro block continues. 1: Stop every block during signal block
operation.
0/1
8102 COLL. ALM OFF Select the interference (bite) control to the workpiece from the tool diameter during tool radius compensation and nose R compensation.
0: An alarm is output and operation stops when an interference is judged.
1: Changes the path to avoid interference.
0/1
8103 COLL. CHK OFF Select the interference (bite) control to the workpiece from the tool diameter during tool radius compensation and nose R compensation.
0: Performs interference check. 1: Does not perform interference check.
0/1
8105 EDIT LOCK B Select the edit lock for program Nos. 8000 to 9999. 0: Program can be edited. 1: Editing of above program is prohibited.
0/1
8106 G46 NO REV-ERR (For L system only)
Select the control for the compensation direction reversal in G46 (nose R compensation).
0: An alarm is output and operation stops when the compensation direction is reversed (G41 G42 G42 G41).
1: An alarm does not occur when the compensation direction is reversed and the current compensation direction is maintained.
0/1
4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters
I-154
# Item Contents Setup range (unit)
8107 R COMPENSATION 0: In arc cutting mode, the machine moves to the inside because of a delay in servo response to a command, making the arc smaller than the command value.
1: In arc cutting mode, the machine compensates the movement to the inside because of a delay in servo response to a command
0/1
8108 R COMP Select Specify whether to perform arc radius error correction over all axes or axis by axis.
0: Perform correction over all axes. 1: Perform correction over axis by axis. Note: This parameter is effective only when
#8107 R COMPENSATION is 1.
0/1
8109 HOST LINK Specify whether to enable computer link B instead of the RS-232C port.
0: Disable computer link B to enable normal RS-232C communication.
1: Enable computer link B to disable normal RS-232C communication.
0/1
8110 G71/G72 POCKET Set the pocket machining if there is a dimple (pocket) in the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72) finishing program.
0: Pocket machining OFF 1: Pocket machining ON
0/1
8111 Milling Radius Select the diameter and radius of the linear axis for milling (cylindrical/pole coordinate) interpolation.
0: All axes radius command 1: Each axis setting (follows #1019 dia diameter
designated axis) Note: This parameter is valid only in the milling
(cylindrical/pole coordinate) interpolation mode.
0/1
8112 DECIMAL PNT-P 0: The decimal point command for G04 address P is invalidated.
1: The decimal point command for G04 address P is validated.
0/1
8113 MillingInitG16 0: Plane other than G16
1: Select G16 plane
8114 MillingInitG19
Designate which plane to use for milling machining after the power is turned ON or reset.
#8113 #8114 Plane 0 0 G17 plane 0 1 G19 plane 1 0 1 1 G16 plane
Note: This parameter is valid for the G code system
2, 3 (#1037 cmdtyp=3, 4).
0: Plane other than G19
1: Select G19 plane
4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters
I-155
4.2.3 Axis Parameters [AXIS PARAMETER] PARAM 1.6/8
#
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
# Item Contents Setup range (unit)
8201 AX. RELEASE Select the function to remove the control axis from the control target.
0: Control as normal. 1: Remove from control target.
0/1
8202 OT-CHECK OFF Select the stored stroke limit II function set in #8204 and #8205.
0: Stored stroke limit II valid 1: Stored stroke limit II invalid
0/1
8203 OT-CHECK-CANCEL When the simple absolute position method (#2049 type is 9) is selected the stored stroke limits I, II (or IIB) and IB will be invalid until the first zero point return is executed after the power is turned ON.
0: Stored stroke limit II valid (according to #8202)
1: Stored stroke limit II invalid Note: Temporary cancel of #8203 soft limit affects
all the stored stroke limits.
0/1
8204 OT-CHECK-N This sets the coordinates of the () direction in the moveable range of the stored stroke limit II or the lower limit coordinates of the prohibited range of stored stroke limit IIB. If the sign and value are the same as #8205, the stored stroke limit II (or IIB) will be invalid. If the stored stroke limit IIB function is selected, the prohibited range will be between two points even when #8204 and #8205 are set in reverse. When II is selected, the entire range will be prohibited.
99999.999 (mm)
4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters
I-156
# Item Contents Setup range (unit)
8205 OT-CHECK-P This sets the coordinates of the (+) direction in the moveable range of the stored stroke limit II or the upper limit coordinates of the prohibited range of stored stroke limit IIB.
99999.999 (mm)
8206 TOOL CHG. P Set the coordinates of the tool change position for G30. n (tool change position return). Set with coordinates in the basic machine coordinate system.
99999.999 (mm)
8207 G76/87 IGNR (For M system only)
Select the shift operation at G76 (fine boring) and G87 (back boring).
0: Shift effective 1: No shift
8208 G76/87 () (For M system only)
Specifies the shift direction at G76 and G87. 0: Shift to (+) direction
1: Shift to () direction
8209 G60 SHIFT (For M system only)
Set the last positioning direction and distance for a G60 (uni-directional positioning) command.
99999.999 (mm)
8210 OT INSIDE The stored stoke limit function to be set in #8204 and #8205 prevents the machine from moving to the inside or outside of the specified range.
0: Inhibits outside area (select stored stroke limit II.)
1: Inhibits inside area (select stored stroke limit II B.)
0/1
8211 MIRR. IMAGE Enable or disable the parameter mirror image function.
0: Disable 1: Enable
0/1
4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters
I-157
4.2.4 Barrier Data [BARRIER] PARAM 1.7/8
# 8300 P0 X 0.000 8301 P1 X 0.000 Z 0.000 8302 P2 X 0.000 Z 0.000 8303 P3 X 0.000 Z 0.000 8304 P4 X 0.000 Z 0.000 8305 P5 X 0.000 Z 0.000 8306 P6 X 0.000 Z 0.000 # ( ) X( ) Z( )
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
P1 P4
P2 P5
P3 P6
P0
# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8300 PO
(For L system only) Set the reference X-coordinates of the chuck and the tail stock barrier. Set the center coordinate (Radius value) of workpiece by the basic machine coordinate system.
99999.999 (mm)
8301 8302 8303 8304 8305 8306
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 (For L system only)
Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier. (Radius value) Set the coordinate value from the center of workpiece for X-axis. Set the coordinate value by basic machine coordinate system for Z-axis.
99999.999 (mm)
8310 Barrier ON (For L system only)
Select the validity of the chuck and tailstock barrier. 0: Invalid (Setting from special display unit valid) 1: Valid
0/1
8311 8312
P7 P8 (For L system only)
Set the area of the left spindle section. X axis: Set the coordinate value from the
workpiece center (P0). (radius value) Z axis: Set the coordinates in the basic
machine coordinate system.
99999.999 (mm)
8313 8314
P9 P10 (For L system only)
Set the area of the right spindle section. X axis: Set the coordinate value from the
workpiece center (P0). (radius value) Z axis: Set the coordinates in the basic
machine coordinate system.
99999.999 (mm)
8315 BARRIER TYPE (L) (For L system only)
Set the shape of the left chuck and tailstock barrier. 0: No area 1: Chuck 2: Tailstock
0/1/2
4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters
I-158
# Item Contents Setup range (unit)
8316 BARRIER TYPE I (For L system only)
Set the shape of the right chuck and tailstock barrier.
0: No area 1: Chuck 2: Tailstock
0/1/2
8317 DELIV. AX. NAME (For L system only)
When the right chuck and tailstock barrier is movable, set the name of the delivery axis. When using the 2-system method and the delivery axis is an axis in the other system, designate the system as 1A, 1B or 2A, 2B. If the system is not designated as A and B, the set system will be used.
A/B/.. (axis address)
1A/1B/.. 2A/2B/.. (system designation)
0 (cancel) 8318 STOCK ANGLE (L)
(For L system only) Set the angle for the left tailstock end section. The angle will be interpreted as 90 if there is no setting (0).
0 to 180 () 0: 90 default
8319 STOCK ANGLE I (For L system only)
Set the angle for the right tailstock end section. The angle will be interpreted as 90 if there is no setting (0).
0 to 180 ()
4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters
I-159
4.2.5 Tool Measurement Parameter [TLM PARAMETER] PARAM 1.8/8
# 8701 Tool Length 8702 Tool Dia 8703 OFFSET X 8704 Y 8705 RETURN 8706 FEED # ( ) X( ) Z( )
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8701 Tool length Set the length to the end of the touch tool. 99999.999 (mm) 8702 Tool Dia Set the spherical diameter of the touch tool end. 99999.999 (mm) 8703 OFFSET X Set the spindle center deviation amount from the
touch tool center in the X axis direction. 99999.999 (mm)
8704 Y Set the spindle center deviation amount from the touch tool center in the Y axis direction.
99999.999 (mm)
8705 RETURN Set the return distance to contact the touch tool against the workpiece again.
99999.999 (mm)
8706 FEED Set the ederate when contacting the touch tool against the workpiece again.
1 to 60000 (mm/min)
4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters
I-160
4.3 I/O Parameters Pressing the menu key
I/O PARA displays the I/O BASE PARAM screen. There are basically two types of input/output parameters which must be set when inputting, outputting or
referring to data, or when performing tape operation. One type is the parameters related to the input/output device. The baud rate, etc., is set according to each device. Up to five types of input/output devices can be registered. The other type of input/output parameters is the I/O base parameters which determine which device is connected to which channel per input/output application.
4.3.1 I/O BASE PARAM [I/O BASE PARAM] PARAM 2.1/7
#
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
#
Specify the board No. to which the serial input/output device is connected to 2. Set 1 to use ch1. Set 2 to use ch2.
Set the input/output device No. for each application. The device Nos. are 0 to 4 and correspond to the input/output device parameters. The device name set in the input/output device parameter is also displayed for identification.
DATA IN 9001 Specify the port for inputting the data such as machine program and parameters.
9002 Specify the No. of the device that inputs the data.
DATA OUT 9003 Specify the port for outputting the data such as machine program and parameters.
9004 Specify the No. of the device that outputs the data.
TAPE MODE 9005 Specify the input port for running with the tape mode.
9006 Specify the No. of the device to be run with the tape mode.
MACRO PRINT
9007 Specify the output port for the user macro DPRINT command.
9008 Specify the No. of the device for the DPRINT command.
PLC IN/OUT 9009 Specify the port for inputting/outputting various data with PLC.
9010 Specify the No. of the device for the PLC input/output.
REMOTE PROG IN
9011 Specify the port for inputting remote programs.
9012 Specify the number of the device used to input remote programs.
EXT UNIT 9013 Specify the port for communication with an external unit.
9014 Specify the number of the unit used for communication with an external unit
4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters
I-161
# Item Contents Setup range (unit)
9015 PORT NO. (tool ID)
Set the number of the port connected with the tool ID. (Either ch1 or ch2 can be used.) Set 1 to use ch1. Set 2 to use ch2.
1/2 (M64)
9016 DEV. NO. (tool ID)
Set the number of the input/output device to be used. (Any device No. can be used.)
0 to 4 (M64)
4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters
I-162
4.3.2 I/O DEVICE PARAM
Parameters for up to five types of input/output devices can be set in DEV <0> to <4>. [I/O DEVICE PARAM] DEV 0 PARAM 2.2/7
# # # 9101 DEVICE NAME - 9111 DC2/DC4 OUTPUT - 9121 EIA CODE [ - 9102 BAUD RATE - 9112 CR OUTPUT - 9122 ] - 9103 STOP BIT - 9113 EIA OUTPUT - 9123 # - 9104 PARITY CHECK - 9114 FEED CHR. - 9124 - 9105 EVEN PARITY - 9115 PARITY V - 9125 = - 9106 CHR. LENGTH - 9116 TIME-OUT(sec) - 9126 : - 9107 TERMINATOR TYPE - 9117 DR OFF - 9127 $ - 9108 HAND SHAKE - 9118 DATA ASCII - 9128 ! - 9109 DC CODE PARITY - 9119 INPUT TYPE - 9129 9110 9120 9130 # ( ) DATA ( )
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 9101 DEVICE NAME Set the device name corresponding to the device
No. Set a simple name for quick identification.
Use alphabet characters numerals and symbols to set a name within 3 characters.
9102 BAUD RATE Set the serial communication speed. 0: 19200 (bps) 1: 9600 2: 4800 3: 2400 4: 1200 5: 600 6: 300 7: 150
9103 STOP BIT Set the stop bit length used in the start-stop system. 1: 1 (bit) 2: 1.5 3: 2
9104 PARITY CHECK Specify whether to add the parity check bit to the data during communication.
0: Parity bit not added
1: Parity bit added 9105 EVEN PARITY Specify the odd or even parity when it is added to
the data. 0: Odd parity 1: Even parity
9106 CHR. LENGTH Set the length of the data bit. 0: 5 (bit) 1: 6 2: 7 3: 8
9107 TERMINATOR TYPE The code to terminate data reading can be selected. 0 and 3: EOR 1 and 2: EOB or EOR
4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters
I-163
# Item Contents Setup range (unit)
9108 HAND SHAKE Specify the transmission control method. The method will be no procedure if a value except 1 to 3 is set.
1: RTS/CTS method 2: No procedure (No
handshaking) 3: DC code method
9109 DC CODE PARITY Specify the DC code when the DC code method is selected.
0: No parity to DC code (DC3 = 13H)
1: DC code with parity (DC3 = 93H)
9111 DC2/DC4 OUTPUT Specify the DC code handling when outputting data to the output device.
DC2 / DC4 0: None / None 1: Yes / None 2: None / Yes 3: Yes / Yes
9112 CR OUTPUT Specify whether to insert the
0: Do not add 1: Add
9113 EIA OUTPUT In data output mode, select the ISO or EIA code for data output. In data input mode, the ISO and EIA codes are identified automatically.
0: ISO code output 1: EIA code output
9114 FEED CHR. Specify the length of the tape feed to be output at the start and end of the data during tape output.
0 to 999 (characters)
9115 PARITY V Specify whether to check the parity of the No. of characters in block during data input. The No. of characters is factory-set so that the check is valid at all times.
0: Do not perform parity V check
1: Perform parity V check
9116 TIME-OUT Set the time out time to detect an interruption in communication. Time out check will not be executed when set to 0 to 30 seconds.
0 to 30 (s)
9117 DR OFF Specify whether to check the DR data at the data input/output.
0: DR valid 1: DR invalid
9118 DATA ASC II 0: Output in ISO/EIA code (Depends on whether #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413, or #9513 EIA output parameter is set up)
1: Output in ASC II code
0/1
9119 INPUT FORM Specify the mode for input (collation). 0: Standard input (Data from the very first EOB is
handled as significant information.) 1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are
skipped until data other than EOB is input.
0/1
4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters
I-164
# Item Contents Setup range (unit)
9121 9122 9123 9124 9125 9126 9127 9128
EIA CODE [ ] # = : $ !
When output with EIA code data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code not included in EIA is specified. Specify the codes which do not duplicate the existing EIA codes by hexadecimal for respective special codes.
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
9201 Set the same settings for device 1.
9301 Set the same settings for device 2.
9401 Set the same settings for device 3.
9501 Set the same settings for device 4.
4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters
I-165
4.3.3 COMPUTER LINK PARAMETER [COMPUTER LINK PARAMETER] PARAM 2.7/7
# # # 9601 BAUD RATE 0 9611 LINK PARAM. 3 00 9621 DC1 OUT SIZE 0 9602 STOP BIT 0 9612 LINK PARAM. 4 00 9622 POLLING TIMER 0 9603 PARITY EFFECTIVE 0 9613 LINK PARAM. 5 00 9623 TRANS. WAIT TMR 0 9604 EVEN PARITY 0 9614 START CODE 0 9624 RETRY COUNTER 0 9605 CHR. LENGTH 0 9615 CTRL. CODE OUT 00 9625 0 9606 HAND SHAKE 0 9616 CTRL. INTERVAL 0 9626 9607 TIME-OUT SET 0 9617 WAIT TIME 0 9627 9608 DATA CODE 0 9618 PACKET LENGTH 0 9628 9609 LINK PARAM. 1 00 9619 BUFFER SIZE 0 9629 9610 LINK PARAM. 2 00 9620 START SIZE 0 9630 #( )DATA( )
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
# Item Contents Setup range (unit)
9601 BAUD RATE Specify the rate at which data is transferred. 0: 19200 (bps) 1: 9600 2: 4800 3: 2400 4: 1200 5: 600 6: 300 7: 110 8: 38400
9602 STOP BIT Specify stop bit length used in start-stop mode. See PARITY EFFECTIVE in #9603. The number of characters is adjusted in output mode so that no problems occur if the parity check is enabled.
1: 1 2: 1.5 3: 2
9603 PARITY EFFECTIVE This parameter is set when using a parity bit separately from the data bit.
ON OFF
Start bit Data bit
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 bn
1 character
Stop bitParity bit Set this to match the input/output device specifications.
0: No parity bit used in I/O mode
1: Parity bit used in I/O mode
9604 EVEN PARITY Specify whether even or odd parity is used when parity is used. This parameter is ignored when no parity is used.
0: Odd parity 1: Even parity
9605 CHR. LENGTH Specify data bit length. See PARITY EFFECTIVE in #9603.
2: 7 3: 8
4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters
I-166
# Item Contents Setup range (unit)
9606 HAND SHAKE RS-232C transmission control mode DC control mode should be set for computer line B.
0: No control 1: RTS/CTS method 2: No handshaking 3: DC control mode
9607 TIME-OUT SET Specify time-out time at which an interruption of data transfer during data input/output should be detected. If 0 is set, time infinity is specified.
0 to 999 (1/10s)
9608 DATA CODE Specify the code to be used. See PARITY EFFECTIVE in #9603.
0: ASCII code 1: ISO code
9609 LINK PARAM. 1 Bit 1: DC1 output after NAK or SYN Specify whether to output the DC1 code after the
NAK or SYN code is output. Bit 7: Enable/disable resetting Specify whether to enable resetting in the
computer link.
0: Don't output the DC1 code.
1: Output the DC1 code.
0: Enable resetting
in the computer link.
1: Disable resetting in the computer link
9610 LINK PARAM. 2 Bit 2: Specify the control code parity (even parity for the control code).
Set the parity in accordance with the I/O device specifications.
Bit 3: Parity V Specify whether to enable checking of parity V in
one block in data input mode.
0: No control code parity added
1: Control code parity added
0: Disable 1: Enable
9611 LINK PARAM. 3 Not used 9612 LINK PARAM.4 Not used 9613 LINK PARAM.5 Not used 9614 START CODE Specify the code by which file data transfer begins
at first. This parameter is used for a specific user, and set 0 in this parameter for normal operation.
0: DC1 (11H) 1: BEL (07H)
4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters
I-167
# Item Contents Setup range (unit)
9615 CTRL. CODE OUT Bit 0: NAK output Specify whether to send the NAK code to the host if a communication error occurs in computer link B.
Bit 1: SYN output Specify whether to send the SYN code to the host if NC resetting or an emergency stop occurs in computer link B.
Bit 3: DC3 output Specify whether to send the DC3 code to the host when communication ends in computer link B.
0: Do not output the NAK code.
1: Output the NAK code.
0: Do not output the
SYN code. 1: Output the SYN
code. 0: Do not output the
DC3 code. 1: Output the DC3
code. 9615 CTRL. CODE OUT Bit 0: NAK output
Specify whether to send the NAK code to the host if a communication error occurs in computer link B.
Bit 1: SYN output Specify whether to send the SYN code to the host if NC resetting or an emergency stop occurs in computer link B.
Bit 3: DC3 output Specify whether to send the DC3 code to the host when communication ends in computer link B.
0: Do not output the NAK code.
1: Output the NAK code.
0: Do not output the
SYN code. 1: Output the SYN
code. 0: Do not output the
DC3 code. 1: Output the DC3
code. 9616 CTRL. INTERVAL Not used 9617 WAIT TIME Not used 9618 PACKET LENGTH Not used 9619 BUFFER SIZE Not used 9620 START SIZE Not used 9621 DC1 OUT SIZE Not used 9622 POLLING TIMER Not used 9623 TRANS. WAIT TMR Not used 9624 RETRY COUNTER Not used
4. Parameters (User) 4.4 Setup Parameters
I-168
4.4 Setup Parameters Pressing the menu key
SETUP displays the OPEN SETUP PARAM screen. The system's basic parameters are normally hidden as setup parameters to prevent mistaken operations
and to simplify the display. The setup parameters can be displayed and set by making a declaration to open the setup parameters on
this screen. [OPEN SETUP PARAM] PARAM 3. 1/2
Open the menu setup parameter?
YES : "Y" "INPUT"
NO : "N" "INPUT"
# ( )
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU 1) Select the setup parameter. Key-in "Y" in # ( ), and then press
INPUT key. The normally hidden setup parameter menu will display when the menu changes over. The required menu can be selected to display and set the setup parameters. 2) Cancel the setup parameter selection. Key-in "N" in # ( ), and then press
INPUT key. The setup parameter menu will disappear. (Note) The setup parameters are not displayed when the power is turned ON. Refer to Alarm/Parameter Manual (BNP-B2201) for details on the setup parameters. Always turn the power OFF after selecting the setup parameters.
4. Parameters (User) 4.5 BACKUP Screen
I-169
4.5 BACKUP Screen If the page key
NEXT PAGE is pressed on the SETUP screen, the BACK UP screen will open.
[OPEN BACKUP] PARAM 3. 2/2
Open the BACKUP screen?
YES : "Y" "INPUT"
NO : "N" "INPUT"
# ( )
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU Input "Y" in the setting area # ( ), and press the
INPUT key. The BACKUP screen will open. [BACKUP] PARAM 3
Please execute "EMERGENCY STOP" before operation. #1 BACKUP BACKUP INFORMATION #2 RESTORE SAVE DATE 01/09/05 16:24 SER.NO. M6123456789
# ( ) ( )
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
The date and time that the backup data was saved, and the serial No. are displayed on this screen.
4. Parameters (User) 4.5 BACKUP Screen
I-170
4.5.1 Backup Operations The parameters are backed up in the maintenance memory cassette with the following steps.
"EMG EMERGENCY" will appear at the operation message area.
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
#( ) ( ) EMG EMERGENCY
Execute emergency stop. (1)
#(1) ( ) PLC STOP Y/N EMG EMERGENCY
Input "1" at the setting area # ( ), and press the
INPUT key.
(2)
"PLC STOP Y/N" will appear at the message area. WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
#(1) ( Y) BACKUP EXEC Y/N EMG EMERGENCY
Input "Y" at the setting area ( ), and press the
INPUT key.
(3)
"BACKUP EXEC Y/N" will appear at the message area.
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
Input "Y" at the setting area ( ), and press the
INPUT key.
(4) #(1) ( Y) BACKUP EXECUTION EMG EMERGENCY
(a) The message "BACKUP EXECUTION" will appear while the parameters are being backed up.
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
(b) The message "BACKUP COMPLETE" will appear when backup is completed.
#( ) ( ) BACKUP COMPLETE EMG EMERGENCY
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
(Note 1) Other screens cannot be opened during this operation. (Note 2) If the PLC is already stopped, step (3) is skipped. The PLC will not start running even when the operations are completed. (Note 3) If the
INPUT key is pressed without inputting anything at the "~Y/N" display, the error "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur.
(Note 4) Even if the PLC RUN/STOP changeover is prohibited (R2925/bit2 ON), the PLC will stop with step (3).
4. Parameters (User) 4.5 BACKUP Screen
I-171
4.5.2 Restoration Operations The parameters are restored from the maintenance memory cassette to the NC with the following steps.
"EMG EMERGENCY" will appear at the operation message area.
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
#( ) ( ) EMG EMERGENCY
Execute emergency stop. (1)
#(2) ( ) PLC STOP Y/N EMG EMERGENCY
Input "2" at the setting area # ( ), and press the
INPUT key.
(2)
"PLC STOP Y/N" will appear at the message area. WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
#(2) ( Y) RESTORE EXEC Y/N EMG EMERGENCY
Input "Y" at the setting area ( ), and press the
INPUT key.
(3)
"RESTORE EXEC Y/N" will appear at the message area.
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
Input "Y" at the setting area ( ), and press the
INPUT key.
(4) #(2) ( Y) RESTORE EXECUTION EMG EMERGENCY
(a) The message "RESTORE EXECUTION" will appear while the parameters are being restored.
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
(b) The message "RESTORE COMPLETE" will appear when the restoration is completed.
#( ) ( ) RESTORE COMPLETE EMG EMERGENCY
WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU
(Note 1) Other screens cannot be opened during this operation. (Note 2) If the PLC is already stopped, step (3) is skipped. The PLC will not start running even when the operations are completed. (Note 3) If the
INPUT key is pressed without inputting anything at the "~Y/N" display, the error "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur.
(Note 4) Even if the PLC RUN/STOP changeover is prohibited (R2925/bit2 ON), the PLC will stop with step (3).
5. Program
I-172
5. Program Pressing the function selection key
EDIT MDI displays the following menu.
Edit menu MDI Menu Edit master menu
MDI EDIT
Menu selection keysPrevious page key Next page key
MDI-ENT
SEARCH PROGRAM LARGE FILE
Selecting
MDI or
EDIT displays the following menu:
MDI-ENT
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
MDI menu
SEARCH PROGRAM
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
SMALL LARGE
FILE Edit menu
5. Program 5.1 Function Outline
I-173
5.1 Function Outline (1) Function outline When the function selection key
EDIT MDI is pressed, the EDIT or MDI screen appears.
The EDIT screen enables you to add, delete, or change the machining program contents stored in memory. It also enables you to register a new program number in memory and prepare a new program on the screen.
The MDI screen enables you to set, correct, or erase MDI data. It also enables you to register a program prepared as MDI data in memory as a machining program.
(2) Display when the screen is selected When the
EDIT MDI key is first pressed after the power is turned ON, the MDI screen appears.
To edit a machining program on the EDIT screen, use the menu key to change the screen. No programs to be edited are called on the initial edit screen. Perform
SEARCH or
MAKE operation. To edit a program already registered in memory, perform
SEARCH operation. To register a new program in memory, perform
MAKE operation. If the MDI screen is selected, MDI data can be entered as it is without operation such as a search. If
EDIT MDI screen operation is interrupted and any other function is executed, the previous screen selected
(MDI or EDIT) will appear and the previous data will be displayed by again selecting the
EDIT MDI screen.
Then, the data input or edit operation can be continued. (3) Fixed cycle program edit To edit a fixed cycle program, set a given parameter. The EDIT screen can be used to edit a fixed cycle program by setting "1" in parameter #1166 "fixpro". (4) Editing macro operators If a character string that matches a macro operator exists in the machining program (including a
comment statement), it is automatically converted into the corresponding intermediate code during editing. This may cause a string different from that entered to be displayed during editing.
(Example) ATN ATAN SQR SQRT RND ROUND
5. Program 5.2 Menu Function
I-174
5.2 Menu Function 5.2.1 MDI Screen Menu Function (1) Menu when
EDIT MDI screen is selected
MDI EDIT
MDI G28 Z100.0 ; G0 X250.0 ; %
$1
(Note 1)
Menu Function
MDI Reverse display of MDI menu means that MDI screen is selected. MDI data can be set on the MDI screen.
Edit Use this key to change the MDI screen to the EDIT screen.
(Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the system name of the currently selected system is displayed as
$1 (system 1) and $2 (system 2). This is not displayed when using a 1-part system. (Only L system)
(Note 2) Whether to show or hide name of the selected system can be switched with the parameters. #1050 MemPrg Details
0, 2, 4, 6 The name of the selected system is not displayed. 1, 3, 5, 7 The name of the selected system is displayed.
5. Program 5.2 Menu Function
I-175
(2) MDI screen extension operation menu MDI-ENT
Menu Function
MDI-ENT MDI data can be registered in memory as a work program.
Extension operation menu is also highlighted when it is selected. When one extension operation menu
is selected, its corresponding extension operation is enabled and MDI data cannot be set. When no extension operation menu is selected, MDI data can be set.
When an extension operation menu key is once pressed, the extension operation menu is selected. When the key is again pressed, the extension operation menu is unselected. At normal completion of setting processing, automatically it becomes unselected.
(Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the method for registering the MDI data as a machining program in the memory can be switched with the parameters.
#1050 MemPrg
#1285 ext21/bit0 Details
0, 4 - The MDI data common for the systems is registered as a machining program common for the systems.
1, 5 OFF The MDI data common for the systems is registered as a machining program for the selected system.
ON The MDI data common for the systems is registered as a machining program for the selected system. If the system is not selected, an empty (only EOR [%]) machining program is registered.
2, 6 - The MDI data for the selected system is registered as a machining program common for the systems.
3, 7 OFF The MDI data for the selected system is registered as a machining program for the selected system.
ON The MDI data for the selected system is registered as a machining program for the selected system. If the system is not selected, an empty (only EOR [%]) machining program is registered.
5. Program 5.2 Menu Function
I-176
(3) MDI data setting
(1) Enter MDI data by pressing the data keys in sequence according to the machining program listing.
N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-100. Y-100. ; N4 G01 X-300. F2000; N5 Y-300. ; N6 X-100. ; N7 Y-100. ; N8 M02 ;
N1G28X0Y0Z0;N2G92X0Y0Z0;N3G00X-100.Y- 100.;N4G01X-300.F2000;N5Y-300.;N6X-100 .;N7Y-100.;N8M02;
EDITING
1) The data is written into the MDI memory area.
2) It is displayed on every line per block. 3) The message "MDI SETTING COMPLET"
is displayed and MDI operation is enabled. The running start position is the starting block of data. The cursor is displayed in the starting block.
(2) Press the
INPUT key. N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-100.Y-100.; N4 G01 X-300.F2000 ; N5 Y-300.; N6 X-100.; N7 Y-100.; N8 M02 ; %
MDI SETTING COMPLET
CAUTION
Because of key chattering, etc., during editing, "NO NOS. FOLLOWING G" commands become a "G00" operation during running.
(Note 1) If the
INPUT key is not pressed, data is simply displayed on the screen and is not actually stored in memory. Be sure to press the
INPUT key. (Note 2) See 5.3 for details of key operation to set MDI data. (Note 3) Check the "MDI SETTING COMPLET" message before starting MDI operation. If the "EDITING"
or "MDI NO SETTING" message is displayed, MDI operation cannot be started. If the
INPUT key is pressed at the time, the "MDI SETTING COMPLET" message is displayed.
(Note 4) If the system is changed while correcting the MDI data, the corrections will be canceled.
5. Program 5.2 Menu Function
I-177
(4) Setting the MDI running start position To start processing with a halfway block after setting MDI data, specify the starting block. First, set the
data according to "Setting MDI Data". At this time, the running start position is set in the starting block of data. If it is desired to be changed, move the cursor to the head of the block to be defined as the starting position. Then, press the
INPUT key.
(Example) When the block containing M02 is desired to be executed.
1) MDI running is enabled, beginning with the specified block.
2) The specified block is displayed at the top of the screen head with "MDI SETTING COMPLET" displayed.
1) The "MDI NO SETTING" status returns.
Press the
INPUT key.
N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-100.Y-100.; N4 G01 X-300.F2000 ; N5 Y-300.; N6 X-100.; N7 Y-100.; N8 M02 ; % MDI NO SETTING
Move the cursor to the head of the block to be defined as the starting position.
N8 M02 ; % MDI SETTING COMPLET
5. Program 5.2 Menu Function
I-178
5.2.2 EDIT Screen Menu Function (1) Menu when
EDIT MDI screen is selected
MDI EDIT
0 1000 TEST CUT PROGRAM EDIT N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300; N4 G01 X-200. F2000; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N7 Y200.; M02 ; %
$1
(Note 1)
Menu Function
Edit Reverse display of EDIT menu means that EDIT screen is selected. Machining program can be set on the EDIT screen.
MDI Use this key to change the EDIT screen to the MDI screen.
(Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the system name of the currently selected system is displayed as
$1 (system 1) and $2 (system 2). This is not displayed when using a 1-part system. (Only L system)
(Note 2) Whether to show or hide name of the selected system can be switched with the parameters. #1050 MemPrg Details
0, 2, 4, 6 The name of the selected system is not displayed. 1, 3, 5, 7 The name of the selected system is displayed.
(2) EDIT screen extension operation menu
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE or SEARCH MAKE SMALL FILE
Menu Function
SEARCH 1. Any desired character string can be searched. 2. Program number and sequence number for edit can be searched.
PROGRAM New machining programs can be prepared and stored on the screen.
FILE 1. A list of the machining programs registered in memory can be checked. 2. Comments can be set.
LARGE 40 characters are displayed in one line on the screen.
SMALL 80 characters are displayed in one line on the screen.
5. Program 5.2 Menu Function
I-179
Extension operation menu is also highlighted when it is selected. When one extension operation menu is selected, its corresponding extension operation is enabled and programs cannot be edited. When no extension operation is selected, program can be edited.
When an extension operation menu key is once pressed, the extension operation menu is selected. When the key is again pressed, the extension operation menu is unselected. At normal completion of setting processing, automatically it becomes unselected.
(3) Edit program call To edit a program on the EDIT screen, first press the extension operation menu key
SEARCH or
MAKE . To edit an already stored program in memory, press
SEARCH . To store a new program in memory, press
MAKE . For details, see 5.5. Once the program edit operation begins, the operation is as follows: If another function screen is
operated during program edit operation and then the EDIT screen is reselected, the previously edited data will be displayed. In the following cases, the system enters the status in which nothing has been called. Thus, retry data search before edit operation.
The program being edited on the EDIT screen is condensed by the condense function. The EDIT screen is then selected.
The program being edited on the EDIT screen is merged with another program by the merge function. The EDIT screen is then selected.
(4) Large-size mode/small-size mode The EDIT and MDI screens can be switched between the large-size and small-size modes.
O123 EDIT
Machining program edit area (39 characters x 12 lines)
SEARCH MAKE SMALL
O123 EDIT
Machining program edit area (39 characters x 12 lines)
Machining program address menu display area
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
40 characters
18 li
ne s
80 characters
Large-size mode Small-size mode
18 li
ne s
In large-size mode, data search and program creation are enabled. The FILE menu is not available; refer to the data input/output program list to check the stored
programs. (Note 1) Switching the mode in the EDIT screen automatically changes the mode in the MDI screen. (Note 2) During editing (while message "EDITING" is displayed on the lower right of the screen),
menu keys
LARGE and
SMALL are disabled, i.e., pressing it does not change the mode. To
change the mode, the
INPUT key must be pressed to end editing. (Note 3) The mode thus set is held after the screen is changed or after power is turned OFF. (Note 4) If the system is changed while editing the machining program, the edited details will be
canceled.
5. Program 5.3 Program Edit Operation
I-180
5.3 Program Edit Operation Program edit operation is common to the EDIT and MDI screens. 5.3.1 Data Display Update (One Screen Scroll) Data display on the screen can be
updated in screen units by using the page key
PREVIOUS PAGE or
NEXT PAGE .
When the
NEXT PAGE key is pressed, the
data displayed at the screen bottom is moved to the screen top; when the
PREVIOUS PAGE key is pressed, the data
displayed at the screen top is moved to the screen bottom.
N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N11 X100. Y10. ; N12 Z300. ; N13 Y200. ; N22 X30. Y20. ; N23 X12 Y25. ; N24 G00 X10. ; %
NEXT PAGE
NEXT PAGE
NEXT PAGE
PREVIOUS PAGE
PREVIOUS PAGE
PREVIOUS PAGE
For example, assume that data is displayed as shown in the right. N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300.; N4 G01 X-200. F2000 ; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N12 Z300.;
Press the
NEXT PAGE key.
N12 Z300.; N13 Y200.; N14 N15 N22 X30. Y20.; N23 X12. Y25.;
5. Program 5.3 Program Edit Operation
I-181
5.3.2 Data Display Update (One Line Scroll)
Data display on the screen can be updated in line units by using the
or
key. If the
key is pressed when the cursor is placed at the screen bottom or if the
key is pressed when the cursor is placed at the screen top, display is scrolled one line.
N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300.; N4 G01 X-200. F2000; N5 Y-200.; N11 N12 Z300.; N13 Y200.; N14 N15
The cursor is moved on a single screen.
The cursor is not moved and the screen is scrolled.
The cursor is moved downward each time the
key is pressed.
N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300.; N4 G01 X-200. F2000 ; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N12 Z300.;
1) Whenever the key is pressed, the cursor is moved downward one line.
2) If the key is pressed when the cursor
reaches the screen bottom, display data is scrolled up one line. The cursor remains at the screen bottom.
3) If the key is furthermore pressed, the display data is scrolled up one line and new data is displayed at the screen bottom.
4) In contrast, whenever the
key is pressed, the cursor is moved upward one line. If the key is pressed when the cursor reaches the screen top, the display data is scrolled down one line and the previous block data is displayed at the screen top.
N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300.; N4 G01 X-200. F2000 ; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N12 Z300.; N13 Y200.;
5. Program 5.3 Program Edit Operation
I-182
5.3.3 Data Change
A machining program can always be edited unless it is run in memory mode. For example, when the data to be edited is displayed as shown in the right, let's try to change the N7 Y200. ; block to G03 Y200. J100. ;
N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300.; N4 G01 X-200. F2000 ; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N7 Y200.; M02; %
N7 Y 2 0 0 .; M02; %
Move the cursor to the data to be replaced.
(1)
Set new data. G03 Y200. J100. ;
N7 G03Y200.J100.; M02; % EDITING
(2)
1) Each time a character is set the cursor is automatically moved one column to the right.
2) When data is entered by using the keys, the message "EDITING" is displayed.
After completion of correction, press the
INPUT key.
N7 G03 Y200. J100.; M02; %
(3)
1) The new data is written into memory. 2) The new data is also displayed with each word
being both preceded and followed by space code.
3) When the data has been written into memory, the "EDITING" message disappears.
5. Program 5.3 Program Edit Operation
I-183
5.3.4 Data Insertion (
SHIFT
DELETE INS )
For example, let's try to insert data F5000 in the block N7 G03 Y200. J100.;.
Move the cursor to the character following the position in which the data is to be inserted.
N7 G03 Y200. J100. ; M02; %
(1)
Press the
SHIFT key, then
DELETE INS key.
N7 G03 Y200. J100. ; M02; %
(2)
1) The characters to the right of the cursor are
moved to the right (; in this case). 2) Data can be inserted in the position indicated by
the cursor.
Insert the data. F5000
N7 G03 Y200.J100.F5000 ; M02; % EDITING
(3)
1) When the key for the character to be inserted is
pressed, the character is set in the position indicated by the cursor.
2) Each time one character is inserted, the cursor is automatically moved one column to the right and the characters to the right of the cursor (; in this case) are also moved to the right.
3) Any number of characters can be consecutively inserted by repeating 1) and 2) above. However, when there is no space to the right of the cursor on the screen, no more data can be inserted.
4) When data is entered by using the keys, the message "EDITING" is displayed.
After completion of correction, press the
INPUT key. N7 G03 Y200.J100.F5000 ; M02; %
(4)
1) The new data is written into memory. 2) The new data is also displayed with each word
being both preceded and followed by space. 3) When the data has been written into memory,
the "EDITING" message disappears.
5. Program 5.3 Program Edit Operation
I-184
5.3.5 Deletion of One Character (
DELETE INS )
For example, let's try to delete the character 0 to change F5000 in the block N7 G03 Y200. J100. F5000.;
to F500.
Move the cursor to the position of the character to be deleted.
N7 G03 Y200. J100.F5000; M02; %
(1)
Press the
DELETE INS key.
N7 G03 Y200. J100.F500 ; M02; % EDITING
(2)
1) The character 0 is deleted. 2) The cursor is automatically moved one
column to the right. 3) When the key is pressed, the message
"EDITING" is displayed.
After completion of correction, press the
INPUT key.
N7 G03 Y200.J100.F500 ; M02; %
(3)
1) The new data is written into memory. 2) The characters to the right of the deleted
character, (; in this case) are moved to the left. 3) When the data has been written into memory,
the "EDITING" message disappears.
5. Program 5.3 Program Edit Operation
I-185
5.3.6 Deletion of One Block (
C.B CAN )
For example, let's try to delete the entire block N7 G03 Y200. J100. F500 ; .
Move the cursor to the position of the block to be deleted.
N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N6 X200.; N7 G03 Y200. J100. F500 ; M02; %
(1)
Press the
C.B CAN key.
(2)
1) Data in the entire block is deleted. 2) When the key is pressed, the message
"EDITING" is displayed.
N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N6 X200.; M02; % EDITING
After completion of correction, press the
INPUT key.
N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N6 X200.; M02; %
(3)
1) The data in the block is deleted from memory. 2) The blocks following the deleted data block
(M02; and % in this case) are moved forward for display.
3) When the data in the block has been deleted from memory, the "EDITING" message disappears.
5. Program 5.3 Program Edit Operation
I-186
5.3.7 Deletion of Data on One Screen For example, assume that data is displayed as
shown in the right. Let's try to delete all blocks (sequence numbers 1 to 12) displayed on the screen.
N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N12 Y-300.;
Press
SHIFT key, then
C.B CAN key.
EDITING
(1)
1) The full screen becomes blank. 2) When the keys are pressed, the message
"EDITING" is displayed.
Press the
INPUT key. N13 X-100.; N14 Y-100.;
(2)
1) The data displayed on the entire screen is
deleted from memory. 2) Display is started at the block following the
deleted data. 3) When the data has been deleted from memory,
the "EDITING" message disappears.
5. Program 5.4 MDI Screen Extension Operation
I-187
5.4 MDI Screen Extension Operation 5.4.1 MDI Data Registration in Memory (
MDI-ENT ) Data set on the MDI screen can be registered in memory. Comments can be added to indicate the contents
of the program to be registered.
Memory operation
Registra- tion
MDI data
Machine control
Memory O 1 O 100 O 1000 O 1234
For example, assume that MDI data is set as shown in the right. The MDI data registration procedure in memory is described below:
MDI N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-100. Y-100.; N8 MO2 ; %
MDI-ENT
(1)
1) The setting area for "MDI-ENT" is displayed. MDI-ENT
O( ) COMMENT( )
Press the menu key
MDI-ENT .
(2)
MDI-ENT
O( 1234) COMMENT( )
Set the registered program number. A comment can also be set at the same time. (Example) O ( 1 2 3 4 ) COMMENT ( )
1) If the program has been registered normally into memory, the message "MDI ENTRY COMPLETE" is displayed. The display is cleared from the setting area; the MDI-ENT menu display returns to normal display from the reverse display.
Press the
INPUT key. (3)
MDI ENTRY COMPLETE
MDI-ENT
(Note) If preparing comment, space (
SP ) can be written in it. But, the space is ignored after registration for efficient use of memory.
5. Program 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation
I-188
5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation 5.5.1 Edit Data Call (
SEARCH ) The calling method of the program or block to be edited is explained. The search function is also used to call
a separate machining program from the currently running one for background edit. A search can be executed for the program head, character string, and sequence number.
(1) Search for the program head In the setting field, specify the program number of the program to be called. The operating procedure is as follows:
1) The setting area for "SEARCH" is displayed. SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
O( ) N ( ) - ( )
Press the menu key
SEARCH .
(1)
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
O( 1000) N ( ) - ( )
Set the called program number. (Example) O ( 1 0 0 0 ) N ( ) - ( )
(2)
Press the
INPUT key.
(3)
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
SEARCH EXECUTION O( 1000) N ( ) - ( )
1) The message "SEARCH EXECUTION" is displayed during searching.
2) The specified program is displayed, beginning with top of the program.
3) The cursor is displayed at the top of the screen.
4) At normal completion of program head search, display of the setting area disappears and SEARCH menu display is restored to normal mode from reverse mode.
O 1000 EDIT N1 G28 X0Y0Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300.; N4 G01 X-200. F2000 ; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N7 Y200.; M02 ; %
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
5. Program 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation
I-189
(2) Character string search The character string search is useful particularly
to search the word data to be corrected. Specify the called program number and character string in the setting area. However, the program number need not be specified if the program already displayed on the screen is searched for a given character string.
O 1000 EDIT N1 G28 X0Y0Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300.; N4 G01 X-200. F2000 ; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N7 Y200.; M02 ; %
SEARCH MAKE SMALL FILE
The operation procedure is described below:
1) The setting area for "SEARCH" is displayed. SEACH MAKE LARGE FILE
O( ) N ( ) - ( )
Press the menu key
SEARCH . (1)
SEACH MAKE LARGE FILE
O( ) N ( G01) - ( )
Set the called program number and character string. (Example) O ( ) N ( G 0 1 ) - ( )
(2)
Press the
INPUT key.
(3)
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
SEARCH EXECUTION O( ) N ( G01) - ( )
1) The message "SEARCH EXECUTION" is
displayed during searching. 2) A search for the specified character string is
started at the top of the specified program. The program is displayed starting at the block containing the found character string. However, for the program already displayed on the screen, a search for the specified character string is started at the displayed portion.
3) The cursor is displayed at the top of the found character string.
4) At normal completion of character string search, display of the setting area disappears and SEARCH menu display is restored to normal mode from reverse mode.
O 1000 EDIT N4 G01 X-200. F2000 ; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N7 Y200.; M02 ; %
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
5. Program 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation
I-190
(Note 1) When a given character string is not found, a "NO CHARACTERS" message is displayed. (Note 2) A string of up to 11 characters may be specified. (Note 3) The specified character string is searched and identified in the specified number of character
strings regardless of the preceding and subsequent characters. That is, for example, if G2 is to be searched, G2 of G20 to G29 and G200 and up cannot be classified and will become target character strings.
[Setup example of character string data] N (N10 ) The character string "N10" is searched. (N10 and N100 are also searched.) N (N10 X100.) The character string "N10 X100". is searched. N (X01234.567) The character string "X01234.567" is searched (X1234.567 is not searched.) N (EOR ) The character string "%" (EOR code) is searched.
5. Program 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation
I-191
(3) Sequence number, block number search Specify the called program number, sequence number, and block number in the setting area. If only
digits are set in N ( ), a sequence number search is made. (If an alphabetic character or symbol is contained, a character string search is made.) To search the top of a program, specify only the program number. To search an already displayed program on the screen for a given sequence number, program number specification may be omitted.
The operation procedure is described below. SEARCH MAKE SMALL FILE
O 1000 EDIT N1 G28 X0Y0Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300. F2000; N4 G01 X-200.; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N7 Y200.; M02 ; %
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
O( ) N ( ) - ( ) Press the menu key
SEARCH . (1)
1) The setting area for "SEARCH" is displayed.
Set the called program number, sequence number, and block number. (Example) O ( ) N ( 6) - ( )
(2)
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
O( ) N ( 6 ) - ( )
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
SEARCH EXECUTION O( ) N ( 6 ) - ( ) Press the
INPUT key. (3)
1) The message "SEARCH EXECUTION" is
displayed during searching. 2) A search for a given N number is started at
the top of the specified program. The program is displayed starting at the block containing the found N number. However, for the program already displayed on the screen, a search for the specified N number is started at the displayed portion.
3) The cursor is displayed at the top of the found block.
4) At normal completion of search, display of the setting area disappears and SEARCH menu display is restored to normal mode from reverse mode.
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
O 1000 EDIT N6 X200.; N7 Y200.; M02 ; %
(Note 1) When a given N number is not found, an "NB NOT FOUND" message is displayed. (Note 2) If a given program number is not found, a "PROG NOT FOUND" message is displayed. (Note 3) The sequence number can be specified in a maximum of five digits.
5. Program 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation
I-192
(4) Action to be taken when the "NO CHARACTERS" or "NB NOT FOUND" error occurs If a search can be executed for the currently displayed screen, the search starts with the starting block
being displayed. If the specified data is not found before the program end (%), the "NO CHARACTERS" or "NB NOT FOUND" occurs. By pressing the
INPUT key at this time, the search is retried beginning with the program head. If a search is executed for data in a block that is before the currently displayed data, the search will be accomplished by the second search.
(Example)
N1; N2; N3; N4; N5; N6; N7; %
Program head
Data being displayed on screen
(1)
(2) (Example 1) For search for N4: (1) First search ... Error "NB NOT FOUND" (2) Second search ... N4 can be found. (Example 2) For search for N7: (1) First search ... N7 can be found. (Example 3) For search for N8: (1) First search ... Error "NB NOT FOUND" (2) Second search ... "NB NOT FOUND"
(5) Precautions for 2-part system When using the 2-part system, the methods for searching the program or block to be edited can be
switched with the parameters. #1050
MemPrg #1285
ext21/bit0 Details
0, 2, 4, 6 - The machining program registered in the memory common for the systems is searched for with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.
1, 3, 5, 7 OFF Selected system: The machining program registered in the memory for each system is searched for with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.
System that is not selected: The searched machining program is held. ON Selected system: The machining program registered in the memory for
each system is searched for with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.
System that is not selected: The machining program registered in the memory for each system is searched for with the designated program No.
When using the 2-part system and the same number batch generation for all system programs is valid, the program is erased in the following manner according to whether programs are present for each system.
Presence of program System 1 System 2
Operation
Yes Yes The System 1 and System 2 machining programs are searched for simultaneously.
Yes No The System 2 machining program is newly created, and the System 1 and System 2 machining programs are searched for simultaneously. (Note) An error (E14) will occur if the number of programs is insufficient.
No Yes The System 1 machining program is newly created, and the System 1 and System 2 machining programs are searched for simultaneously. (Note) An error (E14) will occur if the number of programs is insufficient.
No No An error (E14) occurs.
5. Program 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation
I-193
5.5.2 New Program Registration and Preparation This function is used to prepare a new machining program. To prepare a machining program on the EDIT screen, first press the menu key
MAKE and register the machining program number, then enter the program directly by using the keys.
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
EDIT
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
O( ) COMMENT ( ) Press the menu key
MAKE .
(1)
1) The setting area for "PROGRAM" is
displayed.
Set the new registered program number. A comment can also be set at the same time if necessary. (Example) O ( 1 0 0 0 )
COMMENT ( T E S T )
(2)
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
O( 1000) COMMENT ( TEST)
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
1) When the program number and comment are registered in memory, they are displayed at the screen top.
2) At the time, only one character of "%" is automatically registered in memory as data. Thus, the screen as shown in the right is displayed.
Press the
INPUT key.
(3) O 1000 TEST EDIT %
Enter the work program in sequence by using the keys. Key operation is the same as normal program edit operation.
(4)
(Note 1) To later edit the work program registered in memory by using this function, also call it by pressing
SEARCH as with other programs. (Note 2) If preparing comment, space (
SP ) can be written in it. But, the space is ignored after registration for efficient use of memory.
5. Program 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation
I-194
(Note 3) When using the 2-part system, the methods for registering a new program can be switched with the parameters.
#1050 MemPrg
#1285 ext21/bit0 Details
0, 2, 4, 6 - The machining program is newly registered in the memory common for the systems.
1, 3, 5, 7 OFF The machining program is newly registered in the memory for the selected system.
ON The machining program is newly registered in all system memories. (Note 4) When using the 2-part system and the same number batch generation for all system programs is
valid, an error (E11) will occur if the number being registered is already used in one of the systems.
5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK
I-195
5.6 PLAYBACK The playback function enables creation of a program while trying sample machining by manual (handle or
jog) feed or mechanical handle feed. A machining program can be created with move distance data obtained by manual operation used as
programmed command values.
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
O 100 PLAYBACK N1 G28 XYZ; N2 G00 X10.Y10.;
EDIT [MACHINE] [PLAYBACK : ABS] X -10.100 X -10.000 Y -10.101 Y -10.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 [MEMORY] [ADD]
Playback Edit
x1 Manual feed y1 Move distance
Start
Check the parameter: Use parameter #1126 PB-G90 to determine absolute/incremental values.
Search the edit screen for the number of the machining program to be created in playback mode.
Turn the playback switch ON.
Error? Y
N Move the machine in manual mode.
Create data such as G codes, X and Y axis commands, and F commands.
Error? Y
N
Does playback edit continue?
Y
N
Turn the playback switch OFF.
End
% O 12345678 N1G28X0Y0Z0 ; N2G00X-10. Y-10.; N3G01X-10. Y-20. F1000 ; Machining program
Machining program
% O 12345678 N1G28XYZ; N2G00X-10. Y-10.; N3G01X20. Y-10.F1000;
Machining program creation flowchart in playback mode
5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK
I-196
5.6.1 Playback Operation (1) PLAYBACK screen (a) Creating a program and editing it in playback mode (1) Create a program:
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
O ( 100) COMMENT( ) Press the
EDIT MDI key, then press
menu keys
EDIT and
MAKE .
The setting area for "PROGRAM" is displayed.
Set the program number and comment in the data setting area. (Example) O ( 100) COMMENT (TESTPROG)
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
O ( 100) COMMENT(TESTPROG)
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
O 100 TESTPROG %
EDIT Press the
INPUT key.
The specified program number and comment are displayed on the upper part of the screen, and one character data "%" is automatically stored in memory.
(2) Display the PLAYBACK screen:
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
O 100 PLAYBACK %
EDIT [MACHINE] [PLAYBACK:ABS] X 10.100 X 0.000 Y 20.125 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 [MEMORY] [ADD]
Press the playback switch prepared on the machine side.
Because no program has been made, only "%" is displayed on the left side on the screen. The [MEMORY] field on the right side is blank.
5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK
I-197
(b) Editing a stored program in playback mode (1) Display the EDIT screen.
Press the
EDIT MDI key, then press
menu keys
EDIT and
SEARCH . SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
O ( ) N ( )-( )
The setting area for "SEARCH" is displayed.
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
O 100 PLAYBACK N5 G01 X50. Y50.; N6 X10. Y10. Z10;
EDIT [MACHINE] [PLAYBACK:ABS] X 10.100 X 0.000 Y 20.125 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 [MEMORY] N5 G01 X50. Y50; [ADD]
Press the playback switch prepared on the machine side.
Set the numbers of the program and sequence to call in the data setting area, then press the
INPUT key.
(Example) O ( 100) N ( 5) - ( )
1) The specified program is searched from the
beginning of the block containing the specified character string, then the program is displayed with the block placed on the top.
2) A cursor is placed on the top of the character string displayed.
3) Program editing starts with the block next to the specified one. The specified block is displayed in the [MEMORY] field.
4) Another cursor is displayed in the [ADD] field, allowing the program to be edited.
In either creating and editing a new program or editing a stored program in playback mode, select the
PROGRAM screen and perform editing on the screen. Editing in playback mode is performed using the [ADD] field displayed on the right side on the screen. This therefore prevents the machining program displayed on the left half on the screen from being edited.
The cursor displayed on the left screen indicates the block displayed in the [MEMORY] field on the right screen.
(c) Invoking and editing an another program in playback mode Press menu key
SEARCH again, then repeat the operation described under item (2) .
5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK
I-198
(2) Playback editing 1) Set the parameter to specify whether to perform playback editing in absolute or incremental mode. To edit with absolute values, set #1126 PB-G90 to 1, and to edit with incremental values, set to 0. If the incremental mode is selected, INC is displayed after PLAYBACK on the screen. If the absolute
mode is selected, ABS is displayed. 2) Select the EDIT screen.
SEARCH MAKE SMALL FILE
Press the
EDIT MDI key, then press
menu key
EDIT .
Select "SEARCH".
SEARCH MAKE SMALL FILE
O ( ) N ( )-( ) Press menu key
SEARCH .
Specify the program number and playback mode.
SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE
O 100 PLAYBACK N1 G28 XYZ.; N2 G00 X10. Y10.;
EDIT [MACHINE] [PLAYBACK:ABS] X 10.100 X 0.000 Y 20.125 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 [MEMORY] [ADD]
Press the playback switch prepared on the machine side.
Specify the numbers of the program, sequence and block to be edited in playback mode, then press the
INPUT key. (Example) O ( 100) N ( ) - ( )
This operation displays the PLAYBACK screen on the right half. A data insertion position can be selected by operating the cursor keys. For the details, see Section 5.6.2, "Edit Operation".
3) Move the machine in manual mode.
Move the machine from the work origin to the target position in handle or jog feed mode.
[PLAYBACK : ABS] X 0.125 Y 1.034 Z 0.381
5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK
I-199
4) Convert the playback move distance into machining program data.
Enter the necessary data, such as sequence number and G code. (Example)
N
1
0
G
0
0
[PLAYBACK : ABS] X 0.125 Y 1.034 Z 0.010 [MEMORY] [ADD] N10G00
Press axis address keys such as X and Y. (Example)
X
Y
[PLAYBACK : ABS] X 0.125 Y 1.034 Z 0.010 [MEMORY] [ADD] N10G00X0.125Y1.034
1) When an axis address key is pressed, the playback move distance is displayed after the corresponding axis address.
2) If an axis address key is pressed while the playback counter is operating, playback data at that time is displayed.
Press the
INPUT key. [PLAYBACK : ABS] X 0.125 Y 1.034 Z 0.010 [MEMORY] N10G00X0.125Y1.034; [ADD]
5) End playback editing. Turn the playback switch OFF to end playback editing; the screen returns to the normal editing screen. (3) Notes on playback operation 1) The number of characters specified in the [ADD] field must not exceed 96. 2) If an EOB (;) is omitted at the end of the program created in the [ADD] field, it is automatically
appended when the
INPUT key is pressed. 3) Blocks can be delimited by inserting an EOB (;) between X and Y. 4) If an incorrect data is entered, the error message is displayed when the
INPUT key is pressed. (See the operation messages.)
5) Do not edit macro statements in playback mode; otherwise, for example, if an attempt is made to input "XOR", input of the X may play back the X.
6) If one of the following items is operated during playback editing, another program may be called or the state where no program has been called may occur:
SEARCH ERASE CONDENSE PROGRAM NO. CHANGE
5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK
I-200
(4) Playback counter display Operation of the playback counter may depend on the control unit mode.
#1126 PB-G90=0 #1126 PB-G90=1 Counter display at start of playback
Displays 0. Displays the current value (2) (added by a manual interrupt value if any).
Setting by position data [PLAYBACK: ***]
X 10.002 [ADD] G01X10. ;
INPUT
[PLAYBACK: INC] X 0.002 MEMORY] G01X10. ; [ADD]
The difference between an axis command value and playback counter remains in the playback counter.
[PLAYBACK: ABS] X 10.002 [MEMORY] G01X10. ; [ADD]
The playback counter is not changed and the move distance is accumulated.
Setting G92 (counter preset) [PLAYBACK: ***]
X 20.000 [ADD] G92X10. ;
INPUT
[PLAYBACK: INC]
X 0.000 [MEMORY] G92X10. ; [ADD]
Regardless of the axis command value following G92, the playback counter is cleared to 0.
[PLAYBACK: ABS]
X 10.000 [MEMORY] G92X10. ; [ADD]
The axis command value following G92 is set in the playback counter.
(5) Coordinates to be stored 1) A coordinate value is stored in memory with a decimal point in playback mode. The trailing 0s are
omitted. (Example) Playback counter Memory
X 0.000 X0 X 10.000 X10.
2) The No. of digits in the axis command value during playback will depend on the input unit (#1015 cunit) for each axis.
5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK
I-201
5.6.2 Edit Operation (1) Moving the cursor The block insertion position or deletion block can be specified by moving the cursor vertically on the left
side on the screen. (a) Moving the cursor down
[ADD]
Move the cursor in the [ADD] field down to the third line. (
)
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5
[ADD]
Press the
key again. N1 N2 N3 N4 N5
This moves the cursor on the left side on the screen down. When the cursor key
is further pressed with the cursor located at the bottom of the data field, data scrolls up one line each time. The cursor remains on the bottom.
(b) Moving the cursor up
[ADD]
Move the cursor in the [ADD] field up to the first line. (
)
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5
[ADD]
Press the
key again. N1 N2 N3 N4 N5
This moves the cursor on the left side on the screen up. When the cursor key
is further pressed with the cursor placed at the top of the data field, data scrolls down one line each time; previous block data is displayed at the top.
5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK
I-202
(2) Insertion of block A block can be inserted following the block specified by the cursor on the left side on the screen. (3) Deletion of block
Move the cursor to the block to be
deleted. (
)
N11 N12 N13
N11 N13
The N12 block is deleted, and the updated data is written in memory.
Press the
SHIFT and
C.B CAN keys at
the same time.
(4) [ADD] Program deletion ( C B
CAN ) The program being created in the [ADD] field
on the right side of the screen is completely deleted. The cursor automatically returns to the head of the [ADD] field.
Deleted. [ADD]
5.6.3 Limitations (1) Playback editing is disabled in the machine lock state. (A move distance during machine lock is ignored.) (2) The program that is running under automatic operation cannot be edited in playback mode. (Generally, programs that are running under automatic operation cannot be edited.) (3) A subprogram used in the fixed cycle cannot be edited in playback mode. (Generally, subprograms used in the fixed cycle cannot be edited.) If the playback switch is set to ON on the SEARCH screen, an error results.) (4) While message "EDITING" is displayed, playback editing is disabled. If the playback switch is set to ON, an operation error results. (5) Playback editing is disabled in large-size mode. If the playback switch is set to ON, an operation error results.
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-203
5.7 Word Editing
In addition to the conventional editing function, program editing in word units can be selected. The word editing function allows deletion, replacement, insertion, etc., of the program in word units, enabling concise creation of programs.
(Note 1) Word editing is valid when SETUP PARAMETER "#1139 edtype" is set to 2. (Note 2) Use the word editing function with #1050 MemPrg = 0 (system common program control). If
#1050 MemPrg is set to a value other than 0, the functions may be limited as shown below.
#1050 MemPrg Display Editing, cursor movement Menu operations
0 Enabled Enabled Enabled 2, 4, 6 Disabled Enabled Enabled
1, 3, 5, 7 Disabled Disabled [error (E05)] Disabled [error (E74)]
O12345678 TEST CUT PROGRAM EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ; N4 G01 X200.0 Z200.0 F500 ; N5 X300.0 ; N6 Z300.0 ;
LOOK UP DELETE REPLACE INSERT MENU (1) EDIT Screen Operation Menu
The operation menu format changes according to bit 6 of the SETUP PARAMETER "#1227 aux11/bit6".
When the bit is OFF (menu type 1)
WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN
LOOK UP DELETE REPLACE INSERT MENU
COPY PROGRAM MENU
COM.SRH B.G SRH B.G END COMMENT RETURN
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-204
When the bit is ON (menu type 2)
WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN
Menu Function SEARCH This changes the menu for selecting the search direction. DELETE The word at the cursor position can be deleted.
(The deleted word is set in the EDIT BUFFER area.) REPLACE The word at the cursor position can be replaced with the data in the EDIT
BUFFER area. (The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.)
INSERT A word in the EDIT BUFFER area can be inserted in the location immediately after the word at the cursor position. (The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.)
COPY The word at the cursor position can be copied into the EDIT BUFFER area. PROGRAM The menu changes to the one for searching the program. The searched
program and a list of programs are displayed. COM. SRH The program Nos., sequence Nos., and block Nos. for carrying out automatic
operation can be searched from the machining programs registered in the NC memory.
B.G SRH The program Nos. sequence Nos. and block Nos. for background editing can be searched. If a program No. not registered in the NC memory is set, a new machining program will be registered.
B.G-END This quits the background editing function. COMMENT An outline of the machining program functions, specifications, applications,
etc., can be set as a comment. RETURN This returns to the top menu. WORD This searches in the downward direction. The word matching the search data
is searched, and the cursor moves to that word. (The search data is not cleared.)
WORD This searches in the upward direction. The word matching the search data is searched, and the cursor moves to that word. (The search data is not cleared.)
STR. This searches in the downward direction. The character string matching the search data is searched, and the cursor moves to that word. (The search data is not cleared.)
STR. This searches in the upward direction. The character string matching the search data is searched, and the cursor moves to that word. (The search data is not cleared.)
LOOK UP PROGRAM MENU
COPY DELETE REPLACE INSERT MENU
COM.SRH B.G SRH B.G END COMMENT RETURN
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-205
(2) Foreground/Background Editing Explanation
(a) In the background editing mode
1) The background editing mode lasts from the BG search to the BG quit.
2) "BACKGROUND EDITING" is displayed on the screen.
3) Program indexing is carried out if the
INPUT key is pressed during background editing.
4) Even during program execution, programs besides the one in execution can be edited.
5) If an operation search is commanded from the EDIT screen during background editing, the background editing mode is quit.
6) During background editing, programs not in the background editing mode can be externally searched, searched & started, or operation searched from a screen besides the EDIT screen, and the background editing mode will not quit. Note that background editing mode will quit if a program in the background editing mode is externally searched, searched & started, or operation searched from a screen besides the EDIT screen.
(Note) A BG search is not possible for programs in an operation search or programs in operation. (The error message "E190 FORE EDITING")
(b) In the foreground editing mode
1) The foreground editing mode is a status where the display request during program operation is turned OFF, and the machine is not in the background editing mode.
2) When the system is not running (operation stopped), the edit cursor successively moves to the various steps being executed in automatic operation.
3) Cursor movement is possible in the foreground editing mode, even in a write-protected status.
4) Machining programs in an operation stop status can be edited in single block mode.
5) The foreground editing mode is entered when the power is turned ON. If there is a program that is already being operation searched, that program will become the foreground editing program.
6) Program indexing is carried out with a reset when not in operation.
(Note1) "EDIT POSSIBLE" is displayed on the screen when editing is possible, "EDIT IMPOSSIBLE" is displayed when editing is not possible.
(Note2) "EDIT IMPOSSIBLE" is displayed in the fixed cycle mode during feed hold or single block stop.
(c) In modes besides the foreground editing mode
1) When the display request (Y23C) is ON during program operation, the program in operation is displayed on the left side of the screen.
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-206
5.7.1 Handling of the Various Keys During Word Editing
Various keys during word editing
Key data Edit area (left side)
Edit buffer (right side) Details
Cursor keys (, , , )
: This key moves the cursor to the next word in the order direction.
: This key moves the cursor to the previous word in the opposite direction of the order.
: This key moves the cursor to the head word of the next block.
: This key moves the cursor to the head word of the previous block.
Page keys NEXT : This key changes the screen to the next page in one screen units, and moves the cursor to the head word.
BACK : This key changes the screen to the previous page in one screen units, and moves the cursor to the head word.
DEL This key functions the same as the "DELETE" menu key.
INS This key functions the same as the "INSERT" menu key. Alphabetic keys, numeric keys, symbol keys (0 to 9, A to Z, etc.)
These keys input characters in the edit buffer/search data. The edit buffer/search data is cleared at the alphabetic, numeric, or symbol key input.
C. B This key deletes the last character input in the edit buffer and search data. (This key functions the same as the Back Space key.)
CAN Invalid INPUT When the cursor is at the head of the block:
That block is searched. The operation starts from the designated block.
When the cursor is at a position besides the head of the program block:
The top of the program is searched. Operation starts from the top of the program.
CALC Invalid
Word character judgment method
(1) Data with any of the following head characters are handled as words. A to Z ( ), # / ! % ; [ ]
(2) Macro statements are handled as word characters. Examples of macro statements: GOTO, DO, WHILE, IF, OR, XOR, etc.
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-207
5.7.2 Searching Word Units
(1)
key
This key moves the cursor to the next word in the order direction.
(2)
key This key moves the cursor to the previous word in the opposite direction of the order.
(3)
key This key moves the cursor to the head word of the next block.
(4)
key
This key moves the cursor to the head word of the previous block.
N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ;
N3 Z100.0 ;
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-208
5.7.3 Word Search
The word matching the search data is searched, and the cursor moves to the head of that word. (The search data is not cleared.)
1) The message "SEARCH EXECUTION" appears during the search. 2) Words matching the search data are searched, starting from the word at the cursor position. 3) The cursor moves to the top of the word that was searched. 4) The search data is not cleared. 5) The screen returns to the 1st menu after the search is finished. (The search data is not cleared.) 6) The screen returns to the 1st menu if the menu key
RETURN is pressed. (Note 1) The message "NO CHARACTERS" appears on the screen if the designated word cannot be found. (Note 2) If a word character is input in the search data after the menu key is pressed, the character will be
input after the search data buffer is cleared. (Note 3) The search data is valid until ; (EOB). Only one block can be searched at a time. (Note 4) The
C.B CAN ,
SHIFT , and
DELETE INS keys are invalid while the search menu is displayed.
Select a search in the upward or downward direction. (Ex.)
WORD
O12345678 N3 Z100.0 ;
WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
> Z100.0
Press the menu key
SEARCH . EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
> Z100.0
WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
LOOK UP
Key input the word data to be searched. (Ex.)
Z
1
0
0
.
0
Use the
WORD and
WORD keys in the word search.
1) The cursor moves to
1) Up to 11 characters of search data can be designated.
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-209
5.7.4 Character String Search The character string matching the search data is searched, and the cursor moves to the top of that word. (The search data is not cleared.)
Use the
STR. and
STR. keys in the character string search.
1) The cursor moves to
1) Up to 11 characters of search data can be
designated.
Select a search in the upward or downward direction. (Ex.)
STR.
O12345678 N3 Z100.0 ;
WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
> Z10
Press the menu key
SEARCH . EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
> Z10
WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
LOOK UP
Key input the character string data to be searched. (Ex.)
Z
1
0
1) The message "SEARCH EXECUTION" appears during the search. 2) Character strings matching the search data are searched, starting from the
character string at the cursor position. 3) The cursor moves to the top of the word that was searched. 4) The search data is not cleared. 5) The screen returns to the 1st menu after the search is finished. 6) The screen returns to the 1st menu if the menu key
RETURN is pressed. (Note 1) The message "NO CHARACTERS" appears on the screen if the designated character string cannot
be found. (Note 2) Matching is checked with referring the No. of designated character strings, regardless of the
character strings before and after the ones designated. For example, even if G2 is designated, the character strings G20 to G29, G200 onward, etc., become search targets.
(Note 3) Macro statements are not handled as 1 word of data during a character string search, so the operation differs from that of normal character string searches. For example, if the character "GO" is designated for [GOTO], and a character string search is executed, the cursor will appear at the [GOTO] position.
(Note 4) If a word character is input in the search data after the menu key is pressed, the character will be input after the search data buffer is cleared.
(Note 5) The search data is valid until; (EOB). Only one block can be searched at a time. (Note 6) The
C.B CAN ,
SHIFT , and
DELETE INS keys are invalid while the search menu is displayed.
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-210
5.7.5 Deleting Words
The word at the cursor position can be deleted.
1) The word at the cursor position is deleted. 2) The cursor moves to the next word. 3) The deleted word is set in the "EDIT BUFFER" area.
Move the cursor to the word to be deleted.
NEXT PAGE
PREVIOUS PAGE
Press the menu key
DELETE .
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
Z
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
>Y0
DELETE
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-211
5.7.6 Deleting Lines
The line from the current cursor position to
EOB (;) is deleted.
1) The line from the word at the cursor position
to EOB (;) is deleted. 2) The cursor moves to the head word of the
next line. 3) The deleted line is set in the "EDIT
BUFFER" area.
Press the menu key
DELETE .
Move the cursor to the head word of the line to be deleted.
NEXT PAGE
PREVIOUS PAGE
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ; N4 G01 X200.0;
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ; N4 G01 X200.0 ;
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
Z
O12345678 N1 N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ; N4 G01 X200.0 ;
>G28X0Z0;
DELETE
Deletion starts from this position
N1 G01 X100. Y150. Z0 ; Deletion
Deletion ends at this position
Key input
EOB .
(Note 1) Only the EOB (;) key input in the EDIT BUFFER area is valid. (Note 2) Up to 96 characters of the deleted line, starting from the head word, are set in the EDIT BUFFER
area. (Note 3) After the line is deleted, the deleted words (lines) will be added into the EDIT BUFFER area every
time deleting operation is carried out. Up to 96 characters can be stored in the EDIT BUFFER, so the other characters will be ignored.
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-212
5.7.7 Replacing Words
The word at the cursor position can be replaced with a word in the EDIT BUFFER area data. (The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.)
Move the cursor to the word to be replaced.
NEXT PAGE
PREVIOUS PAGE
Key input the word to be replaced into the EDIT BUFFER area. (Ex.)
Y
1
2
.
3
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
REPLACE
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Y12.3 ;
Press the menu key
REPLACE .
1) The word at the cursor position is replaced with the EDIT BUFFER area data.
2) The cursor appears at the word that was replaced.
3) The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-213
5.7.8 Inserting Words
(1) A word in the EDIT BUFFER area can be inserted in the location immediately after the word at the cursor position.
(The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.)
Move the cursor to the word immediately before the position of the word to be inserted.
NEXT PAGE
PREVIOUS PAGE
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
>M12
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 M12 ;
INSERT
Key input the word to be inserted into the EDIT BUFFER area. (Ex.)
M
1
2
Press the menu key
INSERT .
1) The EDIT BUFFER area data is inserted immediately after the word at the cursor position.
2) The cursor moves to the word that was inserted.
3) The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-214
(2) A Word in the EDIT BUFFER can be inserted before the head word of the program (The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.)
Move the cursor to the empty line at the top of the program.
NEXT PAGE
PREVIOUS PAGE
Key input the word to be inserted into the EDIT BUFFER area. (Ex.)
N
1
Press the menu key
INSERT .
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
INSERT
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0;
1) Deletion and replacement operations are ignored in this state. The word insert function will be canceled if the
NEXT PAGE key is pressed.
1) The EDIT BUFFER area data is inserted at the top of the program.
2) The cursor moves to the word that was inserted.
3) The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-215
5.7.9 Copying Words
The word at the cursor position can be copied into the EDIT BUFFER area.
Press the menu key
COPY .
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
>Y0
COPY
Move the cursor to the word to be copied.
NEXT PAGE
PREVIOUS PAGE
1) The word at the cursor position is set in the EDIT BUFFER area.
2) The cursor moves to the next word.
(Note 1) "%" cannot be copied.
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-216
5.7.10 Program
When the menu key
PROGRAM is pressed, the searched program appears on the left side of the screen, and a list of programs registered in the memory appears on the right side of the screen. The operation search menu (COM.SRH) is highlighted, and the setting area is displayed.
O12345678 TEST CUT PROGRAM EDIT 1/2 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ; N4 G01 X200.0 Z200.0 F500 ; N5 X300.0 ; N6 Z300.0 ; N7 ; N8 ; N9 ; N10 ; N11 ; N12 ; O( )N( )-( )
COM. SRH B.G SRH B.G END COMMENT RETURN
[PROGRAM FILE] PROGRAM ENTRY 11 REMAIN 189 CHARACTER 591 REMAIN 125000
Display item Details 012345678 This item displays the program No. that was searched. N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ; N4 G01 X200.0 Z200.0 F500 ; N5 X300.0 ; N6 Z300.0 ;
This item displays the program that was searched.
PROGRAM ENTRY and REMAIN
The No. of programs already registered as user machining programs appears in the PROGRAM ENTRY column. The remaining No. of programs that can be registered appears in the REMAIN column. The total of the No. of registered programs and the remainder is the max. No. of programs. This figure is determined by the specifications.
CHARACTER and REMAIN The No. of characters already registered as user machining programs appears in the CHARACTER column. The remaining No. of characters that can be registered appears in the REMAIN column. The value in the REMAIN column is displayed in 250-character units.
specifications, applications, etc., can be displayed as a comment in this item. The comment can be set with up to 18 alphanumeric and symbol characters.
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-217
5.7.11 Deleting Programs
A program to carry out automatic operation can be deleted from the machining programs registered in the memory.
1) The list of programs is updated. 2) The message "DELETE? (Y/N)" appears.
1) Deletion is started. 2) When the designated program No. is found,
that program is deleted. 3) The screen returns to the WORD EDIT
screen (1st menu) if the menu key
RETURN is pressed.
Press
DELETE INS key.
Set the No. of the program to be deleted. (Ex.) O ( 3 ) N ( ) ( )
O 3 N45 G00 X0 Z0 ; N50 G00 X100.0 ; N55 Z100.0 ;
[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 3 4 5
O( 3) N( )-( )
DELETE? (Y/N)
O( 3) N( )-( )
Press
Y Key.
[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 3 4 5
RETURN
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 3 4 5
The program is deleted when
INPUT key is pressed.
(Note 1) Even if there is data in the N ( ) ( ) area during program deletion, it will be ignored. (Note 2) If a sub-program is called from the main program currently being executed, deletion will still be
possible as long as the sub-program is not executed. However, the operation of the program being executed cannot be assured. An error will occur if deletion is designated for a sub-program being executed.
(Note 3) Batch deletion of a setting area is not possible. (Note 4) The list of programs is updated when a program is deleted, but the program display area (left side)
is not.
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-218
5.7.12 Newly Creating Programs
Programs to carry out automatic operation can be created and stored in the memory.
1) The list of programs is updated. 2) Program creation is enabled. 3) The screen returns to the WORD EDIT
screen (1st menu) if the menu key
RETURN is pressed.
Press
SHIFT and
DELETE INS keys.
Set the No. of the program to be registered. (Ex.) O ( 6 ) N ( ) ( )
O 6 %
O( 6) N( )-( )
COM.SRH
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 3 4 5
EDIT
(Note 1) Even if there is data in the N ( ) ( ) area when newly creating the program, it will be ignored. (Note 2) The
SHIFT and
DELETE INS keys are only valid when the COM.SRH menu is highlighted.
(Note 3) An operation search will result if the set program No. has already been registered.
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-219
5.7.13 Operation Search Calling a program
The program Nos., sequence Nos., and block Nos. for carrying out automatic operation can be called from the machining programs registered in the memory.
1) The setting area for "COM. SRH" is displayed.
1) The search starts. 2) When the designated program Nos.,
sequence Nos., and block Nos. are found, that program is displayed, and the screen returns to the WORD EDIT screen (1st menu)
Press
INPUT key.
Press the menu key
COM-SRH .
Set the No. of the program to be called. Set the sequence No. and block No. if required. (Ex.) O ( 1 2 3 ) N ( 4 5 ) ( )
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 3 4 5
O( ) N( )-( )
COM.SRH
O( 123) N( 45)-( )
COM.SRH
SEARCH EXECUTION
O( 123) N( 45)-( )
COM.SRH
EDIT
O 123 N45 G00 X0 Z0 ; N50 G00 X100.0 ; N55 Z100.0 ;
(Note 1) The search will not be executed when the
INPUT key is pressed if only the N No. and B No. have been input.
Always set the program No. before searching. (Note 2) A program deletion operation will be carried out if the program No. is input when the setting area is
displayed and the
C.B CAN key is pressed.
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-220
5.7.14 B. G Search
Calling the program
The program Nos., sequence Nos., and block Nos. to be edited can be called to carry out background editing. New machining programs can be registered if a program No. not registered in the memory is set.
1) The message "SEARCH EXECUTION" appears during the search.
2) The designated program is displayed, and the screen returns to the WORD EDIT screen (1st screen). If the designated program No. does not exist at this time, a new program creation operation will result.
Press
INPUT key.
Set the No. of the program to be background edited. (Ex.) O ( 1 2 3 ) N ( ) ( )
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 3 4 5
O( 123) N( )-( )
B.G SRH
SEARCH EXECUTION
O( 123) N( )-( )
B.G SRH
EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING
O 123 N1 G28 X0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X200.0 ; N5 Z200.0 ;
(Note 1) A program deletion operation will be carried out if the program No. is input when the setting area is displayed and the
C.B CAN key is pressed.
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-221
5.7.15 B. G Quit
The "B.G-END" menu is used to quit the function after carrying out background editing. If a running program is displayed on the EDIT screen, changeover to that program display will not occur unless the "B.G-END" menu is pressed and the background editing is canceled. (The button does not have to be specially pressed even when quitting the background editing if the program in operation is not displayed on EDIT screen.)
5.7.16 Comments
An outline of the machining program functions, specifications, applications, etc., can be set as a comment.
(Note 1) A program deletion operation will be carried out if the program No. is input when the setting area is displayed and the
C.B CAN key is pressed.
1) The "COMMENT" setting area is displayed.
1) The comment is set to the designated program
No. When the designated program No. does not appear on the screen, the page with designated program No. will be displayed. Press
INPUT key again to set the comment.
Press
INPUT key.
Press the menu key
COMMENT .
Set the No. of the program to which the comment will be set. (Ex.) O ( 2 ) COMMENT ( A B C )
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 3 4 5
O( ) COMMENT ( )
COMMENT
O( 2) COMMENT ( ABC )
COMMENT
O12345678 N45 G28 Z0 ; N48 G00 Z200.0 ; N50 Z300.0 ;
[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 ABC 3 4 5
5. Program 5.7 Word Editing
I-222
5.7.17 Setting the Program Operation Start Position
After setting a program for memory operation, the operation can be started from the designated block in the program by designating the starting block. The operation start position in normal word editing is set at the head block of that program. To change this start position, move the cursor to the head of the required starting position block, and press the
INPUT key.
1) The "SEARCH COMPLETE" message
appears, and operation from the designated block is enabled.
Press the
INPUT key.
EDIT
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
EDIT
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
EDIT
O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;
SEARCH COMPLETE
Move the cursor to the head of the required starting position block.
NEXT PAGE
PREVIOUS PAGE
(Note 1) If the
INPUT key is pressed when the cursor is at a position besides the head of the block, the top of the program will be searched. The program will also be displayed from the top.
(Note 2) Up to 96 characters can be key-input in the EDIT BUFFER area.
Caution
If a block in the program is set as the operation start position is set from a block in the program and the program is started, the program before the set block is not executed. If there are coordinate system shift commands or M, S, T, and B commands before the block set as the starting position, carry out the required commands using the MDI, etc. There is a danger of interference with the machine if the operation is started from the set starting position block without carrying out these operations and commands.
6. Data In/Out
I-223
6. Data In/Out When the function selection key
DIAGN IN/OUT is pressed, the following menu is displayed:
Diagnosis menu (No.5 to 8) Diagnosis menu (No.1 to 4) Diagnosis menu (No.9 to 10) Input/output menu (No.5), Program sever menu (No.1 to 3) Input/output menu (No.1 to 4)
ABS-SRV ADJUST HISTORY CONFIG MENU
ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU
AUX-PRM AUX-MON MENU
COPY HOSTSET HOST IC CARD MENU
INPUT OUTPUT ERASE FILE MENU
Menu selection keys Previous page key Next page key
Input/output menu No.1 to 4
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
DATA INPUT
1:IN 2:COMP
DATA
OUTPUT
PROGRAM
ERASE
(Note) Use
I/O PARA of
TOOL PARAM to define the data input/output parameter.
Input/output menu No.5
PROGRAM
COPY COPY CONDENSE
Diagnosis menu Refer to the section on diagnosis.
Program server menu Refer to the section on program server.
MENU
MENU
MENU
PROGRAM
FILE
PROGRAM
FILE
(Note) When connected to MELSEC GPPQ/GPPW or GOT, the RS-232C communication port is used constantly, so the input/output device cannot be used. Thus, if input/output operations are attempted when the parameters are set to MELSEC GPPQ/ GPPW or GOT connection, the "E60 IOP ERR-2" error will occur.
6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT
I-224
6.1 DATA INPUT Pressing the menu key
INPUT displays the DATA INPUT screen. The DATA INPUT screen allows the operator to input user-created machining programs (main program and
subprogram), tool offsets, parameters, common variables and history data.
[DATA INPUT] IN/OUT 1
INPUT OUTPUT ERASE FILE MENU
$1
(Note 3)
# Item Explanation 1 MAIN PROGRAM (Note 1) The types of data that can be input are indicated.
(1) Used when inputting the machining program. 2 TOOL DATA (2) Used when inputting the tool data. 3 PARAMETER (3) Used when inputting the parameter data. 5 COMMON VARI (4) Used to input a common variable. 28 AUX-PARA (5) Used to input an auxiliary axis parameter data. 30 MACRO PROGRAM (6) Used to input a macro program. 60 TRACE DATA (7) Used to input history data. 10 MODE
1: IN 2: COMP
The operation mode on the DATA INPUT screen is changed between IN (input) and COMP (comparison). After power is turned ON, IN mode is initiated. Since indication in active mode is highlighted, make sure that correct mode is selected before input or comparison operation.
11 PORT NO. The I/O port number and device number required to input data are set.
12 DEVICE NO. If they are already set on the I/O BASE PARAM screen, the setup values are displayed. They may be changed on either screen.
(Note 1) To input a fixed cycle program, set the parameter. Refer to the Appendix 4 "Registration/Editing of Fixed Cycle Program". (Note 2) The screen cannot be changed during data input. (Note 3) When using the 2-part system, the system name of the currently selected system is displayed as
$1 (system 1) and $2 (system 2). This is not displayed when using a 1-part system. (Only L system)
(Note 4) Whether to show or hide name of the selected system can be switched with the parameters. #1050
MemPrg #1286
ext22/bit0 Details
0, 2, 4, 6 - The name of the selected system is not displayed. 1, 3, 5, 7 OFF The name of the selected system is displayed.
ON The name of the selected system is not displayed.
6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT
I-225
6.1.1 Change of Input and Comparison To perform data input operation, select the "IN" mode; to perform data comparison operation, select the
"COMP" mode. Before performing input or comparison operation, check the MODE display to ensure that the appropriate mode is set.
To change the mode between input and comparison, perform the following: For example, if the "IN" mode is selected, "IN" is highlighted. (Example) Change to the comparison mode.
# (1 0) DATA (2)
#( 10) DATA ( 2 )
Press the
INPUT key.
1) A change is made to the comparison
mode and the word "COMP" is highlighted.
2) To change to the input mode, set 10 in # ( ) and 1 in DATA ( ), then press the
INPUT key.
6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT
I-226
6.1.2 Machining Program Input To input a user-prepared machining program, perform the following: (1) When inputting the program number output onto tape. The program can be input simply by specifying machining program data type #1. If the program number
is specified, the number on tape takes precedence over that number.
1) Data input is started. The program number being entered is displayed in the setting area.
2) When normal data input is
executed to the end and the EOR code is read, data input is terminated.
Press the
INPUT key.
Set the data type. # ( 1 ) DATA ( )
# ( 1 ) DATA ( )
O1234 (TEST-PRO.#1) ;
%
E E E E E E O O O 1234(TEST-PRO,#1) O N1G28 X0 Y0 Z0 O N2 M02 O O R B B B B R
Program main unit Program number and comment
CAUTION
" ; " "EOB" and " % " "EOR" are explanatory notations. The actual codes are "Line feed" and "%" for ISO, and "End of Block" and "End of Record" for EIA.
To prevent influence from data omission and data transformation in the communication circuit, always verify the data after inputting and outputting machining programs.
6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT
I-227
(2) When program number does not exist on tape Specify machining program data type #1 and the program number to be registered.
E E E E E O O N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 O N2 G00X-100 M02 O O R B B B R
1) Data input is started. 2) The program is registered in
memory with the specified program number.
3) When normal data input is
executed to the end and the EOR code is read, data input is terminated.
Press the
INPUT key.
Set the data type and program number. (Example) To register the program with O1000 # ( 1 ) DATA ( 1 0 0 0 )
# ( 1 ) DATA ( 1000)
N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
%
Program main unit
6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT
I-228
(3) Precaution for using 2-part system When using the 2-part system, the machining program input operation can be switched with the
parameters. #1050
MemPrg #1285
ext21/bit0 #1286
ext22/bit0 Details
0, 2, 4, 6 - The input machining program is registered in the memory common for the systems.
1, 3, 5, 7 OFF OFF The input machining program is registered in the memory for the selected systems.
OFF ON The input machining program is registered in the memory for the selected systems. If the system is not selected, an empty (only EOR [%]) machining program is registered in the memory.
ON OFF The input machining program is separated into machining programs for each system at the $ mark, and is registered in the memory for each system.
ON ON The input machining program is separated into machining programs for each system at the $ mark, and is registered in the memory for each system. If the system does not have a $ mark, an empty (only EOR [%]) machining program is registered in the memory.
(Example) When parameter "#1050 MemPrg" is set to 1, 3, 5 or 7, and "#1286 ext22 bit0" is set to 1,
the file (tape) delimited into systems with the $ mark is separated and input for each system.
E E E E E E E E E E O O O1234 O $1 O N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 O N2 G00 X100. O N2 $2 O G28 X0 O O O R B B B B B B B B R
Program body for System 1 Program body for System 2
6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT
I-229
6.1.3 Inputting Tool Offset Data Data which is output by tool offset data output operation can be input. Data which is created in the same format as output data can be input as tool offset data and workpiece
coordinate offset data. (Note) Tool offset data input operation cannot be made during automatic operation. (1) Inputting tool offset data
Set the data type to tool data. # ( 2 ) DATA ( )
# ( 2 ) DATA ( )
1) Paper tape read is initiated. The contents of input data and message "DATA IN EXECUTION" are displayed.
2) When all data to the end has been input and the tape end code % (EOR) is read, data input ends with message "DATA IN COMPLETE" displayed.
Press the
INPUT key. G10 L10 P;
%
(2) When an error occurs during offset tape input: If an error occurs during offset tape input, the error number and error message will be displayed on the
screen. At this time, input operation stops. (E02, E25, E71, or E86 error) In this case, data input can resume by repressing the
INPUT key while the input screen is being displayed. The data input can resume, beginning with the block next to the erroneous block, which is not input in this case.
6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT
I-230
6.1.4 Inputting Parameter Data Parameter data which has been output by parameter output operation can be input. The input parameter may go effective immediately after it is input or after the power is once turned OFF/ON.
(This is the same as when setting from the screen.) After data is input, turn OFF/ON the power. (Note) Parameter data input operation cannot be made during automatic operation. (1) Inputting parameter data
Set the data type to parameter. # ( 3 ) DATA ( )
# ( 3 ) DATA ( )
1) The parameter data input is started. The contents of input data and message "DATA IN EXECUTION" are displayed.
Press the
INPUT key. P5 N1 L;
%
2) When writing is completed, the message "DATA IN COMPLETE" will display.
Turn the power OFF and ON once.
(2) Input parameter skip operations
1) Skipping N No. data not found in the specifications When "S" is set in the second setting area during data input or compare, and the
INPUT key is pressed, an error will not occur even if parameter No. (N No.) data not found in the specifications is input. Data input and compare of that number will be skipped.
(With normal input and compare, an error will occur if N No. data not found in the specifications is input, and data input/compare will be stopped.)
2) Skipping axis data not found in the specifications When "S" is set in the second setting area during data input or compare, and the
INPUT key is pressed, an error will not occur even if data with a different number of axes is input. Axis parameters not found in the specifications will be skipped during the input and compare.
3) Skipping spindle data not found in the specifications When "S" is set in the second setting area during data input or compare, and the
INPUT key is pressed, an error will not occur even if data with a different number of spindles is input. Spindle parameters not found in the specifications will be skipped during the input and compare.
6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT
I-231
6.1.5 Inputting Common Variables Common variable data that has been output by common variable output operation can be input. (Note) Common variable data input operation cannot be performed during automatic operation. (1) Inputting common variable data
Set the data type to common variable. # ( 5 ) DATA ( )
# ( 5 ) DATA ( )
1) Read of the data is started. The contents of input data and message
"DATA IN EXECUTION" are displayed. 2) When all data through the end has been input
and the tape end code % (EOR) is read, data input ends with message "DATA IN COMPLETE" displayed.
Press the
INPUT key.
%
6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT
I-232
6.1.6 Inputting History Data History data that has been output by history data output operation can be input. History data input operation is performed with DATA IN/OUT 1 screen. (Note) History data input operation cannot be performed during automatic operation. (1) Inputting history data
Set the data type to history data. # ( 6 0 ) DATA ( )
# ( 60 ) DATA ( )
1) Read of the data is started. The contents of input data and message "DATA IN EXECUTION" are displayed.
2) When all data through the end has been input and the tape end code % (EOR) is read, data input ends with message "DATA IN COMPLETE" displayed.
Press the
INPUT key.
%
6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT
I-233
6.1.7 Inputting Waveform Data Waveform data that has been output by waveform data output operation can be input. (1) Inputting waveform data
Set the data type to waveform data. # ( 2 2 ) DATA ( )
# ( 22 ) DATA ( )
1) Read of the data is started. The contents of input data and message "DATA IN EXECUTION" are displayed.
2) When all data through the end has been input and the tape end code % (EOR) is read, data input ends with message "DATA IN COMPLETE" displayed.
Press the
INPUT key.
%
(Note 1) If input operations are attempted while the waveform is displayed, the operation message "V-ANALYZER EXEC." will appear, and the waveform display data will not be input.
(Note 2) If input operations are attempted while the Visual analyzing function is invalid, the error "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur.
6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT
I-234
6.1.8 Inputting Auxiliary Axis Parameter Data Auxiliary axis parameter data that has been output by auxiliary axis parameter output operation can be
input. (1) Inputting auxiliary axis parameter data
Set the data type to auxiliary axis parameter. # ( 2 8 ) DATA ( )
# ( 28 ) DATA ( )
1) Read of the data is started. The contents of input data and message "DATA IN EXECUTION" are displayed.
2) When all data through the end has been input and the tape end code % (EOR) is read, data input ends with message "DATA IN COMPLETE" displayed.
Press the
INPUT key.
%
(Note 1) If MR-J2-CT is not connected, "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur and input will not be carried out. (Note 2) Whether to input the auto-tuning parameters depends on the "#7 ATU" parameter settings in the
input data and NC data.
#7 ATU in input data #7 ATU set in NC Auto-tuning parameter input
Auto-tuned (0 or 1) Auto-tuned (0 or 1) Not input Not auto-tuned (2) Auto-tuned (0 or 1) Input (Note 3) Auto-tuned (0 or 1) Not auto-tuned (2) Input (Note 3) Not auto-tuned (2) Not auto-tuned (2) Input (Note 3)
(Note 3) Which parameters can be input depends on the setting of "#7 ATU" parameter.
Refer to "6.2.7 Outputting Auxiliary Axis Parameter Data" for details on auto- tuning target parameters.
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-235
6.2 DATA OUTPUT Pressing the menu key
OUTPUT displays the DATA OUTPUT screen. The DATA OUTPUT screen allows the operator to output user-created machining programs (main program
and subprogram), tool offset data, parameters, common variables and history data that have been stored in memory.
[DATA OUTPUT] IN/OUT 2
INPUT OUTPUT ERASE FILE MENU
$1
(Note 4)
# Item Explanation 1 MAIN PROGRAM (Note 1) The types of data that can be output are as follows.
(1) Used to output a machining program. 2 TOOL DATA (2) Used to output tool data. 3 PARAMETER (3) Used to output parameter data. 5 COMMON VARIABLE (4) Used to output a common variable. 28 AUX-PARA (5) Used to output an auxiliary axis parameter data. 30 MACRO PROGRAM (6) Used to output a macro program. 60 TRACE DATA (7) Used to output history data. 11 PORT NO. The I/O port number and device number required to output data
are set. 12 DEVICE NO. If they are already set on the I/O BASE PARAM screen, the setup
values are displayed on the DATA OUTPUT screen. They may be changed on either screen.
(Note 1) To output a fixed cycle program, set the parameter. Refer to the Appendix "Registration and editing of fixed cycle programs". (Note 2) If the data protection, edit lock B, or edit lock C condition is set, data may not be output. For the
details, see the descriptions in "Data protection" and "Edit lock" in Section 6.7. (Note 3) The screen cannot be changed during data output.
Output inhibit condition Output method
Data protection key on Machining programs, tool data, parameters
Edit lock B on Machining programs
8000 to 9999
Edit lock C on Machining programs
9000 to 9999 Specifying individual machining programs
No data is output. Machining programs O8000 to 9999 are not output.
Machining programs O9000 to 9999 are not output.
Specifying ALL Specifying a range
No data is output. Machining programs other than O8000 to 9999 are output.
Machining programs other than O9000 to 9999 are output.
(Note 4) When using the 2-part system, the system name of the currently selected system is displayed as $1 (system 1) and $2 (system 2). This is not displayed when using a 1-part system. (Only L system)
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-236
(Note 5) Whether to show or hide name of the selected system can be switched with the parameters.
#1050 MemPrg
#1286 ext22/bit0 Details
0, 2, 4, 6 - The name of the selected system is not displayed. 1, 3, 5, 7 OFF The name of the selected system is displayed.
ON The name of the selected system is not displayed. Operation procedure for outputting data
Check that the output device is connected.
Select the output screen.
Set data for # ( ) DATA ( ) then press the
INPUT key.
Start of data output
Execution of data output
"DATA OUT EXECUTION"
"DATA OUT COMPLETE"
"DATA OUT EXECUTION"
1. Output of one machining program # (1) DATA ( ) ( ) number 2. Output of all data # (1) DATA ( ALL) ( ) 3. Output of data in the specified range # (1) DATA ( ) ( ) min. value max. value
E01 SETTING ERROR E03 NO. NOT FOUND E06 NO SPEC E24 PLC RUNNING
Parameter set value
Parameter set value
Parameter set value
Parameter set value
Is the set data correct?
Continuous output (ALL)?
No
Yes
No
Yes
1. Feed by parameter value and EOR 2. Feed by parameter value and EOB 1. Header data and EOB 2. Data 3. Feed by parameter value 1. EOR and feed by parameter value
Header Data Feed
Feed Feed
O E O B
N1
E O B
E O R
E O R
E O B
Feed
End of data output
Data output
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-237
6.2.1 Machining Program Output To output user-prepared machining programs, perform the following: (1) When only one machining program is output Specify machining program data type #1 and the number of the program to be output.
E E E E E E O O O 1000(TEST) O N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 O M02 O O R B B B B R
1) Data output is started.
Press the
INPUT key.
Set the data type and program number. (Example) To output program O1000 # ( 1 ) DATA ( 1 0 0 0 )
# ( 1 ) DATA ( 1000) ( )
Main program unit Program number and comment (2) When all machining programs are output To output all machining programs registered in memory in batch, specify machining program data type
#1 and "ALL" in DATA ( ).
Press the
INPUT key.
Set 1 in # ( ) and "ALL" in DATA ( ). # ( 1 ) DATA ( A L L )
# ( 1 ) DATA ( ALL ) ( )
All programs are output in the program number ascending order.
E E O O R B
First program
O 100 (Program number and comment) (Program main unit)
E O R
Second program
O 101 (Program number and comment) (Program main unit)
Third and later program (Note 1) When all data of one machining program is output, % is displayed. Note that % is not displayed
each time individual data items are output.
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-238
When output of the first program is completed, %
is displayed before indicating the next program.
Also for each of the second and succeeding programs, % is displayed each time one complete program is output.
After all the specified machining programs are output, EOR is output. EOR is not output for individual program output.
CAUTION
To prevent influence from data omission and data transformation in the communication circuit, always verify the data after inputting and outputting machining programs.
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-239
(3) When the machining programs in the specified range are to be output A group of programs can be output by specifying a range of program numbers. To specify the range, set the
largest and smallest numbers of the machining programs to be output in the data setting area. The machining programs in the specified range are output sequentially in order of their program numbers.
Last program in the specified range
Machining program Feed
1) Data output starts. 2) The number and the contents of the machining
program being output are displayed in the
3) When all the specified machining programs are output, data set in the data setting area disappears and instead message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" is displayed.
The output tape format is as follows:
Press the
INPUT key.
Specify the data type, and then the smallest and largest program numbers. (Example) To output program numbers O9000 to O9999, specify: # ( 1 ) DATA ( 9 0 0 0 )
( 9 9 9 9 )
The machining programs are output sequentially.
Feed
Program number and comment
Machining program Feed Program number
and comment
First program in the specified range Programs of the numbers between the first and last numbers
E E E E E E O O O9000( ); N1 M02O O 9XXX M02O O9999( ); N1 M99O O R B B B B R
Feed Feed
(Note) 1. If the number specified as the smallest number is not found, output starts with the machining
program with the number nearest to that number. Likewise, if the number specified as the largest number is not found, output ends with the
machining program with the number nearest to that largest number. 2. Specify the smallest number first, then the largest number. If the numbers are specified
reversely, program error "E01 SETTING ERROR" occurs.
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-240
(4) For 2-part system When using the 2-part system, the machining program output operation can be switched with the
parameters. #1050
MemPrg #1286
ext22/bit0 Details
0, 2, 4, 6 The machining program registered in the memory common for the systems is output.
1, 3, 5, 7 OFF The machining program registered in the memory for the selected system is output.
ON The machining program registered in the memory for each system is output as one file (tape) delimited with the $ mark.
(Example) When parameter "#1050 MemPrg" is set to 1, 3, 5 or 7, and "#1286 ext22 bit0" is set to 1,
the machining programs registered in each system memory are output as one file (tape) delimited with the $ mark.
E E E E E E E E E E O O O1234 O $1 O N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 O N2 G00 X100. O N2 $2 O G28 X0 O O O R B B B B B B B B R
Program body for System 1 Program body for System 2
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-241
6.2.2 Outputting Tool Offset Data Tool offset data and workpiece coordinate offset data which is set and displayed on the screen can be
output. The output operation can be made also during automatic operation. The output tape length varies with the tool offset type, the number of sets, and the offset data numeric. For
the 40-set specification, this length is 3 to 4m for type I and 12 to 16m for type II. (1) Tool offset data is output as follows:
Set the data type to tool data. # ( 2 ) DATA ( )
# ( 2 ) DATA ( )
1) Output to paper tape is started. The contents of output data and message "DATA OUT EXECUTION" are displayed.
2) After the tape end code % (EOR) is output, data output ends with message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" displayed.
Press the
INPUT key.
(2) Output tape format
Feed
Data area Feed Feed Feed
E E E E O O G10L10P O O R B B R
The data area format is the same as tool offset input (G10) and work offset input (G10) by the program. The data is output in the order of the tool offset and workpiece coordinate offset data.
(Note) For the multiple system, data will be output following the parameters below. #1286 ext22/bit1 0: The data for each system will be output. 1: The data for the system selected with the system selection switch will be output. #1051 MemTol 0: The output will follow ext22 bit1. 1: The common tool offset data specifications will be used between the systems, so the same output as the single system will be used.
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-242
6.2.3 Outputting Parameter Data Parameter data which is set and displayed on the screen can be output. The output operation can be made
also during automatic operation. This format allows the details of the parameters to be read when the parameter data is output to a printer, etc.
The output tape length varies with the number of axes and parameter numeric. For the three-axis specification, this length is 40 to 50m. The following data is output:
User parameters (Machining parameters, control parameters, axis parameters) Data input/output parameters (I/O BASE PARAM, I/O DEVICE PARAM) All setup parameters Internal parameter data (absolute position internal data) (Note 1) The TOOL OFFSET, TOOL REGISTRATION, TOOL LIFE, and WORK OFFSET data are not
output. (1) Outputting parameter data
1) Output to parameter data is started. The message "DATA OUT EXECUTION" are displayed.
2) After the tape end code % (EOR) is output, data output ends with the message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" displayed.
# ( 3 ) DATA ( TEST1) ( )
Press the
INPUT key.
Set the data type to parameter. # ( 3 ) DATA ( T E S T 1 )
(2) Output tape format
Comment Data area Feed Feed
E E E E O O PARA100 ( TEST1 ) O N1001T1P1 O R B B B
Feed Data area Feed
E E O O B R
Header (For tape identification)
The set comment is output.
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-243
(3) Data format The data format is as follows:
Address Definition Details N Parameter number The parameter # number is shown with the value following N. A Axis number For axis data, the axis number is shown with the value following A.
The first axis will be AI. T Axis system number For data per system, the system number is shown with the value
following T. (1st system: T1, 2nd system: T2, PLC axis: T3)
P Parameter data The parameter data is shown with the value following P. The following types of data format are used according to parameter type and display method. (The address order in one block must use the following format.) 1) Common parameter (one data item per one # number)
N1084P0.001;
Parameter setting value
Parameter # number
(1) The output parameter setting value is the same format as the screen display. 2) Axis parameter
N2001A1P10000;
Parameter setting value Axis number 1 to 4
# number on screen
(1) When multiple axes are displayed on one screen The parameter data for when the parameters for multiple axes are displayed on one screen are
output per axis. [Output example]
:
N2001A1P120000 ;
N2002A1P4000 ; N2003A1P21 ;
:
N2001A2P12000 ;
N2002A2P4000 ; N2003A2P21 ;
:
Axis 2 data
Axis 1 data
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-244
3) System parameter
N1001T1P1;
Parameter setting value System number (1: 1st system, 2: 2nd system, 3: PLC axis) Parameter # number
(1) The parameter data on the screen when the parameters are displayed per system are output as
follows. [Output example] : N1001T1P1 ; N1001T2P1 ; N1001T3P0 ; N1002T1P2 ; N1002T2P1 ; N1002T3P0 ; : (2) The parameter data per system displayed by changing over the system (
$ key) is output per system screen.
[Output example] : N8001T1P99 ; N8002T1P0 ; N8003T1P10000 ; : N8001T2P30 ; N8002T2P1 ; N8003T2P20000 ; :
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-245
6.2.4 Outputting Common Variable Data Common variable data can be output. The output operation can be performed even during automatic
operation. (1) Common variable data output operation
1) Data output starts and the contents of the output data and message "DATA OUT EXECUTION" are displayed.
2) When tape end code % (EOR) is output, the data output completes with message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" displayed.
# ( 5 ) DATA ( )
Press the
INPUT key.
Set the data type to the common variable. # ( 5 ) DATA ( )
(Note) For the multiple system, data will be output following the parameters below. #1303 V1comN (#100 to set number) system common variables #1304 V0comN (#500 to set number) system common variables The number of data items designated in the parameter will be output in the same manner as the single system. The other common variables will be output for each system.
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-246
6.2.5 Outputting History Data History data can be output. The output operation can be performed even during automatic operation. The DATA IN/OUT 2 screen is used to output history data. (1) History data output operation
1) Data output starts and the contents of the output data and message "DATA OUT EXECUTION" are displayed.
2) When tape end code % (EOR) is output, the data output completes with message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" displayed.
# ( 60 ) DATA ( 1000 )
Press the
INPUT key.
Set the data type to the history data. # ( 6 0 ) DATA ( )
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-247
6.2.6 Outputting Waveform Data Waveform data can be output. (1) Waveform data output operation
1) Data output starts and the contents of the output data and message "DATA OUT EXECUTION" are displayed.
2) When tape end code % (EOR) is output, the data output completes with message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" displayed.
# ( 22 ) DATA ( )
Press the
INPUT key.
Set the data type to the waveform data. # ( 2 2 ) DATA ( )
(Note 1) If output operations are attempted while the waveform is displayed, the operation message "V-ANALYZER EXEC." will appear, and the waveform display data will not be output.
(Note 2) If output operations are attempted while the Visual analyzing function is invalid, the error "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur.
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-248
6.2.7 Outputting Auxiliary Axis Parameter Data Auxiliary axis parameter data can be output. (1) Auxiliary axis parameter data output operation
1) Data output starts and the contents of the output data and message "DATA OUT EXECUTION" are displayed.
2) When tape end code % (EOR) is output, the data output completes with message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" displayed.
# ( 28 ) DATA ( )
Press the
INPUT key.
Set the data type to the auxiliary axis parameter. # ( 2 8 ) DATA ( )
(Note) If MR-J2-CT is not connected, "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur and output will not be carried out.
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-249
MR-J2-CT Parameters and N No. Correspondence Table
No. Symbol name N No. Remarks 1 MSR 50001 Automatic setting2 2 RTY 50002 3 PC1 50003 4 PC2 50004 5 PIT 50005 6 INP 50006 7 ATU 50007 8 PG1 50008 Auto-tuning 9 50009
10 EMG 50010 11 50011
13 MBR 50013 14 NCH 50014
16 JIT 50016
19 PG2 50019 Auto-tuning 20 VG1 50020 Auto-tuning 21 VG2 50021 Auto-tuning 22 VIS 50022 Auto-tuning 23 VDC 50023 Auto-tuning 24 DG2 50024 Auto-tuning
30 MTY 50030 1 31 TMX 50031 1 32 PMS 50032 1 33 BAS 50033 1 34 MAX 50034 1 35 AMR 50035 1 36 JMK 50036 1 37 KCM 50037 1 38 KVI 50038 1 39 VGM 50039 1 40 MLD 50040 1 41 KEC 50041 1 42 IQG 50042 1 43 IDG 50043 1 44 IQI 50044 1 45 IDI 50045 1
50 MD1 50050 Automatic setting2 51 MO1 50051 Automatic setting2
53 MD2 50053 Automatic setting2 54 MO2 50054 Automatic setting2
56 sty02 50056
No. Symbol name N No. Remarks 100 *station 50100 101 Cont1 50101 102 Cont2 50102 103 EmgCont 50103 104 tleng 50104 105 Axis nam 50105 110 ZRNspeed 50110 111 ZRNcreep 50111 112 grid mask 50112 113 grspc 50113 114 ZRNshift 50114 115 ST.ofset 50115 116 ABS Base 50116 117 Limit(+) 50117 118 Limit() 50118
120 ABS Type 50120 123 ABScheck 50123 130 backlash 50130
132 yobi16a 50132 133 yobi16b 50133 134 yobi32a 50134 135 yobi32b 50135 150 Aspeed1 50150 151 Mspeed1 50151 152 time1.1 50152 153 time1.2 50153 154 TL1 50154 155 OD1 50155 156 just1 50156 157 near1 50157 158 Aspeed2 50158 159 Mspeed2 50159 160 time2.1 50160 161 time2.2 50161 162 TL2 50162 163 OD2 50163 164 just2 50164 165 near2 50165 166 Aspeed3 50166 167 Mspeed3 50167 168 time3.1 50168 169 time3.2 50169 170 TL3 50170 171 OD3 50171 172 just3 50172 173 near3 50173
6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT
I-250
No. Symbol name N No. Remarks
174 Aspeed2 50174 175 Mspeed4 50175 176 time4.1 50176 177 time4.2 50177 178 TL4 50178 179 OD4 50179 180 just4 50180 181 near4 50181 190 stpos2 50190 191 stpos3 50191 192 stpos4 50192 193 stpos5 50193 194 stpos6 50194 195 stpos7 50195 196 stpos8 50196 197 stpos9 50197 200 PSWcheck 50200 201 PSW1dog1 50201 202 PSW1dog2 50202 203 PSW2dog1 50203 204 PSW2dog2 50204 205 PSW3dog1 50205 206 PSW3dog2 50206 207 PSW4dog1 50207 208 PSW4dog2 50208 209 PSW5dog1 50209 210 PSW5dog2 50210 211 PSW6dog1 50211 212 PSW6dog2 50212 213 PSW7dog1 50213 214 PSW7dog2 50214 215 PSW8dog1 50215 216 PSW8dog2 50216 220 push.L 50220 221 push.t1 50221 222 push.t2 50222 223 push.t3 50223
(Note 1) The parameters marked with *1 cannot be set from the screen. (Setting is possible only from the optional setup software.) Note that these parameters can be input/output or backed up to SRAM same as the other parameters.
(Note 2) The items marked with *2 are automatically set, but these parameters can be input/output or backed up to SRAM same as the other parameters.
6. Data In/Out 6.3 PROGRAM ERASE
I-251
6.3 PROGRAM ERASE When the menu key
ERASE is pressed, the PROGRAM ERASE screen is displayed. User-prepared work programs (main program and subprogram) can be erased in any desired program
number or group units on the PROGRAM ERASE screen.
INPUT OUTPUT ERASE FILE MENU
[PROGRAM ERASE] IN/OUT 3 #1 MAIN PROGRAM A 1-- 7999 10000--99999999 #2 B 8000-- 8999 #3 C 9000-- 9999 #4 FIXED CYCLE # ( ) DATA ( )
$1
(Note 1)
Data setting range
# Item Explanation Program number
specification Program
group erase
All program
erase 1 MAIN
PROGRAM
Related manuals for Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the CNC Meldas 60 Mitsubishi Electric works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Operation Manual for Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60 as well as other Mitsubishi Electric manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Operation Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.